JP2022077549A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a Pachinko game machine that can smoothly proceed with a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a movable performance object that can be moved in front of a performance display device. A color that occupies the largest surface area among colors on the back side of the movable performance object is a color of the same system as the color of a performance display device in a state where the performance display device is not displaying an image. The movable performance object has a predetermined substrate on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted. The predetermined substrate is configured so that it does not protrude from the surface of the movable performance object.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 65

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In recent pachinko gaming machines, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit (special game). ) The mainstream is a pachinko machine that shifts to the state and opens the large prize opening provided on the game board to win a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, a time-shortening gaming state that increases the efficiency of probability fluctuation gaming states that increase the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and symbol fluctuations for notifying the lottery results in the jackpot lottery. There are also gaming machines that enhance the interest of the game by creating a gaming progress state that is advantageous to the player according to these gaming states. In addition, there is a risk that a malfunction will occur in the gaming machine, which will be disadvantageous to both the manager of the playing field and the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-139600 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-136688 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-68291

It is desired to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can smoothly proceed with the game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is
A staging display unit that can display images and
Equipped with a movable object for directing that can be moved,
When the movable object for staging performs a predetermined operation, it has a timing to be located in front of the staging display unit.
Movable objects for staging
The front surface that can be seen from the front and
The back surface that cannot be seen from the front,
Having a predetermined board on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted,
The color that occupies the largest area among the colors of the back side display unit and the color of the effect display unit when the effect display unit does not display an image are the same type of color.
The predetermined substrate is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to protrude from the front surface portion or the back surface portion.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly advancing the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a special game operation condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative design effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative design effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative design effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative design effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative design effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative design effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of determining a drawing stop symbol on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is an image diagram of a display mode of a decorative symbol on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative design effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative design effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a transmission effect execution image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram of game parts in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view of a gaming board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of a ball return prevention member in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a side view of the first main game start port attached to the game board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a case where the power supply is cut off after the game ball is launched and then the power supply is restarted in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a case where the power supply is cut off after the game ball is launched and then the power supply is restarted in the pachinko gaming machine provided with the ball entry sensor and the discharge sensor according to the present embodiment. .. FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the gaming ball launched before the power supply is cut off is detected by the ball entry sensor after the power supply is started in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. .. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the relationship between the mounting portion of the center decoration and the gaming ball flowing down on the mounting portion in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a state in which a gaming ball is flowing down on a continuous nail 1 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a perspective view of a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the large winning opening device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the large winning opening device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a front cover and a first base portion of the large winning opening device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is an image diagram illustrating a modified example according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing the movable accessory device YK1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment and the light guide plate. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing a driving unit of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 60 is a front view illustrating the movable range of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a sensor that detects the position of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment and the detection state of the sensor. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a flow of initial operation processing of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 63 is a perspective view illustrating a guide member of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 64 is an image diagram illustrating the operation of the guide member according to the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram relating to the front side surface portion and the back side surface portion of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device. FIG. 66 is a diagram relating to a screw used in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 67 is an outline of the structure of the TFT liquid crystal display. FIG. 68 is an image of a standby screen display in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 69 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the upper surface portion of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 71 is a side view of the upper surface portion of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the upper surface portion of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 73 is a side view of the upper surface of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 74 may be referred to as an image for alerting the end screen of the bonus displayed on the effect display device S40 and the end screen of the AT in progress state at the end of the advantageous game (hereinafter, referred to as “attention image”). There is). FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating the size of the alert image displayed by the effect display device S40. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the timing of displaying the end screen and the alert image on the effect display device S40. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an effect screen (a) suggesting that the cherry role has been won, an image of the push order navigation effect, and an effect screen (b) during the AT preparation game. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating the time spent when the player plays the game in the shortest time. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a state in which the previous game is played in the shortest time and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated immediately after the end of the previous game. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a state in which the final game of the advantageous game is played in the shortest time and the start lever D50 is operated immediately after that. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a state in which the final game of the advantageous game is played over a long period of time without playing in the shortest time. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a demo screen displayed by the effect display device S40. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an image that is repeatedly displayed while the standby demo screen is being displayed. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a case where a warning image is constantly displayed while the standby demo screen is being displayed. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example in which the end screen is displayed on the effect display device S40, the end screen is hidden, and only the attention-calling image is displayed. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a case where an error occurs in the final game of the advantageous game. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a case where an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of an advantageous game. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a case where the power supply is stopped in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a case where the effect switch is operated in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a transparent plate D16 in a pachinko gaming machine.

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a gate without a prize ball payout. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state (the state in which the lid of the large winning opening is open). = Easy to win, closed (closed lid of large winning opening) = non-easy to win. Further, for example, a state in which the lid (shutter) protrudes from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state in which the lid (shutter) is retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as an advanced state). In a configuration (so-called tongue-type attacker) that can take an evacuation state), the advance state = the winning easy state, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo-random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, hard as a random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning or losing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification information are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, and the like, but at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. ) Is called one random number (that is, in the above example, a random number of winning random number + random number of variation mode + random number of design determination ...) is called one random number. It is called). Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the large winning opening can be opened, and a non-probability variable game state (low probability state) in which the lottery probability for transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Transition to game state Probability fluctuation game state with high probability of lottery (high probability state), auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the transition to special game (so-called high base state, for example, start) When the variable member is attached to the mouth, the opening period of the variable member can be lengthened, the probability of winning the opening of the variable member can be increased, and the time for notifying the result of the open lottery of the variable member can be shortened. Yes, all of these are valid or at least one is valid), non-auxiliary gaming state (low base state) without assistance for winning a prize at the starting port that triggers the transition to special game, etc. One or more combinations. The "variable display stop time" is the time for holding the identification information in a stopped state when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and when the hold remains after the variable display is stopped, this variable display stop time is used. After that, the fluctuation related to the remaining hold is started (the fluctuation start condition and the pass / fail judgment permission condition are satisfied). Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (staging symbol, design). The main game symbol (special symbol) is the identification information whose display is controlled on the main control board side, and the decorative symbol (design for effect, design) is the identification information as the effect displayed on the sub control board side. Is. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal display, LED, 7-segment display) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to display content that enhances the interest of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action photographs, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including fluctuations / stops of identification information, notices, etc. The combination of can be mentioned. The "decorative symbol" may be in any form as long as the type of the symbol can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably used for an image object such as a card type or a character type. Visual ones, for example, those with shapes such as numbers (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, letters, symbols, patterns, and patterns are described. Then, by finally stopping and displaying the image object on the valid line with a combination in which the numbers and symbols are the same, it is notified that a big hit has occurred. The "first decorative symbol (first staging symbol)" and the "second decorative symbol (second staging symbol)" are both "decorative symbols (staging symbol, design)". However, each of them is configured to be able to independently notify the occurrence of a jackpot (for example, the "first decorative symbol (first staging symbol)" becomes "777" to notify the occurrence of a jackpot. It is possible, and the "second decorative symbol (second staging symbol)" becomes "777" to notify the occurrence of a big hit). The "variable mode" is, for example, a fluctuating time (including a fluctuating time of a main game symbol (special symbol), a fluctuating time of a decorative symbol (staging symbol, a drawing), and a fluctuating time of a normal symbol), and a decorative symbol. Decorative symbols that can be visually recognized by the player by scrolling from top to bottom (in addition, scrolling from bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.) By switching the type of (directing symbol, design), the decorative symbol (directing symbol, design) is rotated and displayed on the spot and rotated half a turn or once, and the decorative symbol (directing symbol) can be visually recognized by the player. , The type of drawing) is switched (such scroll display, rotation display, etc. may be referred to as "switching display mode") and the like. "Temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) / do not suspend (or temporarily stop) decorative symbols (staging symbols, staging symbols)" means "temporarily stop → re-variate" as one set, and perform this one set / It is synonymous with not doing it. "Re-variation" means a situation such as "temporarily stop the decorative design (staging design, design)-> re-variate", and "start fluctuation-> provisionally change the decorative design (staging design, design)". It is a term that includes situations such as "stopping" and "starting re-variation-> temporarily stopping decorative symbols (designs for staging, staging) (provisional stop after the second time)" in pseudo-continuous staging. A production stage that temporarily stops the combination of pseudo fluctuations and resurrection fluctuations in the resurrection production (for example, during the super reach production, the combination of decorative symbols (designs for production, design) indicating loss is temporarily stopped, and shifts after the super reach production is completed. It is a term that indicates a change that temporarily stops and then deterministically stops to a decorative pattern that indicates a hit after being re-changed in. It is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically, after that, the stop display is deterministically displayed together with the stop display of the so-called main game symbol) for notifying the presence or absence of a big hit. In addition, the "decorative pattern (design for staging, design)" is based on the second element (for example, a number), and the first element (presence / absence / content of incidental information such as a character or "SUPER") or the third element. (For example, a color effect) or the like may be attached. Further, in the "decorative design (design for production, design)", when the production mode is different, even if the second element is the same (same number, same alphabet, same character, same symbol, etc.), the first The elements and / or the third element may be configured differently. Further, due to the difference between the first element and / or the third element, the expectation that the reach variation will be a big hit, and the expectation that the symbol variation related to the pre-reading effect when a specific symbol combination is stopped at the time of executing the look-ahead effect will be a big hit. The profit margin for the player may be different, such as the number of rounds at the time of a big hit and the game state after the big hit. In addition, in such a configuration, a high probability state and a high base state (high probability high base state), a low probability state and a high base state (low probability high base state), and a high probability state and a low base state (high probability state). In the low probability low base state), the first element and / or the third element is advantageous for the player as compared with the case of the low probability state and the low base state (low probability low base state) which are the normal gaming states. It may be configured to be. Further, the "information display unit" is for displaying information including a notice effect, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of them individually. However, a combination of a plurality of display media such as an effect display device + a 7-segment LED + an LED lamp (the entire unit) may be shown. Further, the "effect display unit" is for displaying an effect including a notice effect, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and each of these may be shown as a single unit. However, a combination of a plurality of display media such as an effect display device + a 7-segment LED + an LED lamp (the entire unit) may be shown.

The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 multifunction device) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of turning on / off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa.

(The present embodiment)
Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, and extracting the game ball from the lower ball plate D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and an effect sound (sound effect) according to the gaming state or the like is output.

Next, the game board is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to the windmill D49, a plurality of game nails and various general winning openings (not shown), the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the auxiliary game start port H10, and the first Large winning opening C10, 2nd large winning opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out opening D36 is set up. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is variable to a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than in the normal state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to be vertically overlapped with each other, and due to the presence of the first main game start port A10, the first main game start port A10 is present. 2 The upper part of the main game start port B10 is blocked. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are both the first main game start opening A10. And it is configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to be vertically overlapped with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port is not limited thereto. The A10 and the second main game start port B10 may be configured to be separated from each other. In such a configuration, a member may be provided to close the upper part of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Further, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is likely to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10, and the game area D30. The game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) may be configured so as to be difficult to be guided to the first main game start opening A10, while being easily guided to the second main game start opening B10. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched on the right side and the left side, respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start port H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30. It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided {However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

Next, on the upper right side of the out opening D36, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and flow down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 is opened when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which has a shape and is located on the upper right side of the out opening D36 and below the second major winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and the first large winning opening). The mouth solenoid C13) is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 The big winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advanced state in which the shutter (rod-shaped member) provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the shutter (rod-shaped member) is retracted toward the player side can be taken. It may be a (so-called tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the right upper side of the out opening D36 and above the first large winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). The mouth solenoid C23) is provided. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second major winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second major winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second major winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second major winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easily won. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the shutter provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the shutter is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called tongue). It may be a type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display a maximum of four holdings (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held). Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Low-speed blinking, Number of Holds 3: Medium-speed blinking, Number of Holds 4: High-speed blinking).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a staging role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a staging role and the decorative symbol on the first main game side (decorative symbol on the second main game side) is not displayed. In this case, a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG described later may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG executes an effect image including a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. It is a device to do. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display area SG12 (and a second hold display area SG13) for displaying the main game hold information, and, for example, a plurality of rows of decorative symbols (first decoration) imitating a game of a slot machine. A decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of a symbol and a second decorative symbol) variation is provided. Although the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display area SG12 (and the second hold display area SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays a role of staging by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall gaming operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). Mainly the main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the pachinko machine, and the sub-main control unit SM that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that gives interest to the game content. It is supplied from the sub-control board S, which is equipped with a sub-sub control unit SS that executes the effect display and controls the overall effect, and the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prize ball tank KT according to the prizes in each prize opening. A game of a prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 or the like for paying out a game ball to the upper ball plate D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game of the upper ball plate D20. A launching device D42 that launches balls (reservoir balls) one by one into the game area D30, a launching control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine. , A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the gaming side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the gaming ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. On the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M. Sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are one board) that controls the execution of various effects, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. (Arranged above) and the power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards are mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S has various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), sound from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , Sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) on the effect display device SG. It is provided with two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS to be executed. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.). Here, although not particularly shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to provide an unused area in order to prevent writing of a program or the like modified by fraudulent activity. It is suitable (for example, all unused areas are filled with 0, used areas are packed in a young address, etc.). Also, in order to prevent referencing data that is not normally referenced due to noise or fraudulent activity, it is used only for unused data (for example, data referenced in gaming machines with different specifications or for testing at the development stage). It is preferable to configure it so that the data to be used) is not provided. Similarly, when using the RAM area, it is preferable to pack the area in a young address and use the area so as not to provide an unused program area. Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board / device will be outlined.

First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, first. 1 big prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (not shown, the general winning opening is a entry opening that has a prize ball but does not perform a symbol lottery. )}, Drive solenoids (not shown), drive solenoids (described above, 1st prize opening solenoid C13, 2nd prize opening solenoids C23, etc.), information display LEDs (not shown), etc., which are essential for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the prize ball payout control board KH can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal by wiring. It is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main are configured. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used as the communication method). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of the game ball, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a request for lending the game ball to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launch handle, launch motor, ball feeding device) are provided. Etc.) are also connected. In this embodiment, the gaming ball lending device R is separated from the gaming machine and adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. In that case, the gaming ball lending control board KH is used for lending. Control and management control of recording media for lending such as electronic money may be supervised.

Next, as described above, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effects. It is connected to a drive device (not shown). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the staging display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the staging display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured in. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, by configuring it to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when the VDP integrated with the voice control circuit is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H). It is connected to the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) related to the production and the prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes the image effect, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), the speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM), the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of ROMs and RAMs to be used, elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. It should be noted that each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in the peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each of the above means (devices) will be described.

First, the main control board M includes a game information control means MJ that controls the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and the progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. Game progress means MP that controls, current and past game states [for example, states related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability variable game state, time shortened game state), special game state}, state related to auxiliary game (Easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ] Etc. temporarily stored in the game state temporary storage means MB and various game information on the game peripheral device side {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 10R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss} , Information transmission control means MT (and command transmission buffer for accumulating untransmitted commands) for transmitting information regarding the variation mode (for example, variation time), start signal / state information / end signal of special game, hold information, etc.} It has MT10) and a prize ball payout determining means MH that controls a prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on the winning of a game ball to various winning openings.

Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting opening, etc.) and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result is obtained. It has a random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and a hold control means MJ30 for temporarily storing within an upper limit number of balls entering each start port during variable display as a hold ball. are doing. Further, the game progress means MP directly determines the opening / closing of the display control means MP10 for controlling the fluctuation and stop display of each symbol and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. The second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, the special game control means MP30 that controls the control related to the special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first main. With respect to the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, there is a determination as to which game state the current game state is to be transferred to, and a specific game control means MP50 for performing a process of shifting the game state based on the decision. are doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 has the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start port A10, and the second main game start port. Second main game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10 Auxiliary game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B. The first major winning opening decision means MJ11-C10 and the second major winning opening C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first major winning opening C10 and the entry determination means MJ11-H. It has a second large winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20, which determines whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and determines whether or not to acquire the random number on the first main game side, and according to the determination result. To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A and the second main game start port B10 for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main) is determined according to the determination result. A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number, etc., and an auxiliary game for determining whether or not to acquire an auxiliary game side selection random number and acquiring the random number based on the determination result. It has a random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the scope of the claims including the above and the "random number" in the present specification are, for example, "0" to "65535" and "65535" assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a random number for determining a variation mode). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "0" to "255". Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the values are expressed in sequence along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) Is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination thereof, and the like. By acquiring random numbers by such a method, it is possible to generate aperiodic random numbers that are difficult for the player to predict. On the contrary, for example, in the case of a method of generating the next random number by using the random number used for a certain lottery, it becomes easy to predict the next random number. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

Next, the hold control means MJ30 transfers the hold digestion control means MJ31 that controls the process related to the hold digestion and the change start, and the first main game side random number acquired in a situation where the first main game symbol change permission is not given. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the random numbers, and based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol change permission is given. -A and whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number acquired in a situation where the second main game symbol change permission has not been granted are determined, and the symbol change permission is given to the random number based on the determination result. The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game side random number acquired in the situation where the auxiliary game symbol change permission is not given are temporarily stored. It is determined whether or not to store the random numbers, and based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol change permission is given. Have.

Here, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction determining means MJ31j for determining whether or not the condition for starting the fluctuation is satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H combined a random number that can store up to four random numbers with the holding order. Each has a first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, a second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and an auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporary storage in the form. are doing.

Next, the game content determining means MN goes to the winning / failing lottery means MN10 that draws the winning / failing of the special game and whether or not the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d can be opened, and to the special game if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a hit. (For example, the hit flag is turned on internally), the special game transition determination means MN20, the symbol content determination means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number. Based on the above, it has a variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol. Here, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 is a first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A for performing a winning / failing lottery for the first main game symbol, and a second main game winning / failing lottery means for performing a winning / losing lottery for the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for performing a winning / failing lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / losing lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a winning / losing lottery regarding the first main game symbol. 1st main game win / fail lottery table MN11ta-A, 2nd main game win / fail lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a win / fail lottery for the 2nd main game symbol, and a win / fail lottery for the auxiliary game symbol. Each has a winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-H for auxiliary games, which is referred to when performing the above. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, when executing the winning / failing lottery based on the main game random number, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any of all the winning random numbers, or is a winning. When a part or all of the random number values are continuous numerical values, the hit / fail judgment is executed by determining whether or not the main game random number value is equal to or less than the upper limit value of the winning random number value and equal to or more than the lower limit value. .. By executing such a pass / fail determination, an accurate determination process can be executed. On the contrary, when the hit / fail judgment is executed by comparison with only the upper limit of the hit random number range or comparison with only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, 0 or 1023 when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023). Since it is necessary to set 1023) as a random number value, it becomes vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of passing a current through the main control board M, and all the bits in the storage area tend to be 0 or 1). There is a risk of getting rid of it. Further, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery {when a plurality of random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-step lottery is executed), two random numbers are executed. Because it is necessary to prevent them from synchronizing}.

Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 acquires the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B that determines the stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the random number for determining the game content (the second main game random number), and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H, which determines the stop symbol of.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN41ta-A for determining the first main game symbol is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or not and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the first main game for the normal game state). Lottery table, probability fluctuation game → 1st main game probability fluctuation game state lottery table, time shortening game → 1st main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or not and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery). Table, probability fluctuation game → second main game probability fluctuation game state lottery table, time shortening game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). The MN51-A, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), and It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of success or failure and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the first main game normal). Game state lottery table, probability variable game → 1st main game probability variable game state lottery table, time shortened game → 1st main game time shortened game state lottery table). Further, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. , The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or not and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game). State lottery table, probability fluctuation game → second main game probability fluctuation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for determining the auxiliary game variation mode, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode is determined. The decision lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the display control means MP10 is on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. Assistance for a predetermined time on the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C that controls to stop and display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that controls to stop and display the game symbol after it is changed.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) for managing the fluctuation of the first and second main game symbols that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

Next, in order to determine whether or not the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B satisfies the conditions for opening / closing the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. The second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t for measuring the drive (opening) time of the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. -B and has.

Next, the special game control means MP30 has the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the content of the special game when the special game transition condition is satisfied. (Specifically, the special game content determination means MP32 to be set in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize A special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second big prize opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big prize mouth). It has a special game time management means MP34 for performing (opening and closing time of C10 and the second big winning opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes the first and second large winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d. It has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determining means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b (table). Details are not shown).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time shortened game state is satisfied. It has a time-saving game end condition determination means MP52 for determining. Here, the time-saving game end condition determination means MP52 has a time-saving number counter MP52c, which can count the number of time-saving games. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability fluctuation game in which the lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in the normal game. Point to.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) during the time reduction game as compared with the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). Further, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game with no time reduction limit). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The above-mentioned probabilistic game end condition determination means MP51 and time-saving game end condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time the symbol is changed. (In the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a fall lottery function). The time reduction game state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on or the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction game state. May indicate that the open time extension function is activated (including high accuracy high base state and low accuracy high base state), and the open time extension function is not activated in the non-time reduction gaming state. It may indicate that (including a low probability low base state). The time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a high-probability lottery state, and the non-probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a low-probability lottery state. In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state as another game state is set to the time-reduced game state when the time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state is executed, and the main game symbol is set. When the time-reduced game is not set to a time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state, it is preferable to set the non-time-reduced game state.

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB is the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). The first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, on / off of various flags related to the special game, etc.) It has an MB20b and a specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, on / off of various flags related to the specific game, etc.). ..

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is stopped related to the first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol in which the change start condition is satisfied) currently being changed. It has the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing the symbol and the variation mode information.

Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (auxiliary game symbol for which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripherals include the first main game peripheral device A, which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and the sub-sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol in time. It is related to the display of only the information that does not affect the result of the game, including the fluctuation of the design). Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers a special game transition, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers a special game transition, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in the closed state during normal games, and are in the open state under predetermined conditions during special games (big hits). And has a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H has an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of

Next, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM has the display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and the effect content determination process and display control process related to the effect display. It has an effect display control means SM20 that controls the above, and an information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereinafter, each of the above means will be described in detail.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. ..

Next, the staging display control means SM20 includes the decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the variation mode of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the stop symbol determination process, and the display control process, and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). The design hold information display control means SM22 that controls the hold quantity management and hold display processing of (1 decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the background effect display control means SM23 that controls the background image determination process and the display control process, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect display control means SM24 that controls the content determination process and the display control process, and a reach effect display control means SM25 that controls the reach effect content determination process and the display control process.

Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the decorative symbol {in the present embodiment, it is referred to as two types of decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol). The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independent of each other, and the game is played by combining three numerical symbols of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. The result can be notified} of the stop symbol and the display content determining means SM21n for determining the variation mode, and various information (variation mode) related to the symbol variation of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). Information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.) Temporary storage of design display-related information Temporary storage means SM21b and the first for measuring the fluctuation time of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It has a map variation time management timer SM21t-1. Here, the marking display content determining means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for determining the decoration variation content, which is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decorations referred to when determining (or setting) the effect contents, display update timing, and display update contents of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It also has a design effect table SM21ta-2. Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independently displayed and controlled on the staging display control means SM20 side based on the information from the main control board M side, and these two types are used. By making good use of the decorative design of, it is configured to enhance the interest in the production and to make it easier to grasp the progress of the game. This point will be described later.

Next, the design reservation information display control means SM22 has a design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to the reservation related to the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). ..

Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the background effect display content determining means SM23n that determines the display content of the background effect and the information related to the background effect display based on the information from the main control board M side. It has a background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for the purpose.

Next, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 is the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n that determines the display content and display timing of the advance notice effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and the information related to the advance notice effect display. It has a notice effect-related information temporary storage means SM24b for temporarily storing.

Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is the reach effect display content determination means SM25n that determines the display content and display timing of the reach effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and the information related to the reach effect display. It has a reach effect-related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing the information.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is an image display that displays an image on the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control unit SM side and the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. It has a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display-related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information related to various image displays.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variablely displaying decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), and a first reserved display area SG12 (and a second) for displaying main game hold information. 2 Hold display area SG13) and.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS controls the sub-game. Means (sub-main control unit) It means that it is controlled by SM. It should be noted that it may be configured to control another peripheral device via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

From here, an example of a general processing flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart. The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. .. Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the stage of developing a gaming machine, it is also possible to develop a gaming machine with different specifications at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (in this example, executed by a gaming machine with different specifications) in the processing on the main side. Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, preventing processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of the figure (a) is executed. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the initial setting is performed (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and the reset button of the power supply unit E (RAM clear). It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the administrator of the game hall or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, at that timing, a command may be set and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is stored in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal in step 1010, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M in various ways at the time of power failure. An information command is acquired, and various acquired information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in step 1014 (may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or a command may be set at the relevant timing and a control command described later). It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 4.0 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the figure (b) is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. .. After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

It is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which a special game is executed (noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of program processing). To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed).

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 4.0 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes the special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (particularly, the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs the prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize opening in which the game ball has won a prize. The payout control board KH is made to execute, and the process for managing the result, etc.) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an output process of an external signal (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC, or the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was done. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). Since there are cases, the commands are configured to be transmitted in the order in which the commands are determined to be transmitted on the main control board M side (in the order in which the commands are set).

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power cutoff signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the process of FIG. 3C is executed when the power is turned off in the gaming machine. Will be done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1020, the main control board M sets the power cut information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passed) into the auxiliary game start opening H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the hold balls are not the upper limit (for example, four). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information on the number of the holding balls. Is added by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Even if No in step 1102 or 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory opening flag is off. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. .. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) on the auxiliary game side. At the same time as acquiring, the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining the auxiliary game symbol is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the game state of the acquired auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag). When is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). A predetermined time related to the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the change time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached with reference to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C. do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol by referring to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a “hit”. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag), and the second main game. Start port Electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B has a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off). Seconds) is set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. .. Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B to set the opening time of the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and temporarily assists the game state. The flag for opening the electric accessory in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 or step 1238, the next process is performed. (Processing in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A is from the first main game start opening entry ball detection device A11s of the first main game start opening A10 to the first main game start opening entry ball information. Is received or not. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (particularly the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a win / fail lottery random number for determining the win / fail, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a variation pattern of the main game symbol (special symbol) ( The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers for determining the variation time) are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. .. Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ30 is a command transmission buffer for transmitting information to the effect that the first main game hold random number has been acquired (first main game hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. In addition, even if No in step 1302 or step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312.

Next, in step 1312, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the second main game start opening ball entry from the second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s of the second main game start opening B10. Determine if information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (particularly the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a win / fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the case of the first main game content determination means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. .. Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 is a command transmission buffer for transmitting information to the effect that the second main game hold random number has been acquired (second main game hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). Even if No in step 1312 or 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

In this embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, but the information on the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. It may be transmitted with a hold number, and it is also possible to substitute this information as information indicating that a random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol exists. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game symbol). (Even if) is configured to prioritize the hold digestion of the second main game symbol, but it is not limited to this (hold digestion based on the winning order and simultaneous parallel of both main game symbols). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery to draw a lot).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not being performed (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not being changed, and the main game symbol is held. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the variable start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the variable fixed time. It may be configured not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the hold digestion control means MJ31 becomes the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, which is temporarily stored, is read out, and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game). It is deleted from the symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (hold digestion processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, and is the first. 1 The main game symbol winning / failing lottery is executed based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small hit) in which the gaming state cannot be changed is not illustrated, but a small hit may be generated (a small hit is won). Further, in such a configuration, for example, (1) the winning probability of a small hit differs between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first main game side is higher than the second main game side. Is easy to win (the second main game side does not have to provide a small hit), (2) When a small hit is won, the game state after the small hit ends is the same as the game state before the small hit starts. (If the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends may be different from the gaming state before the jackpot starts), (3) The jackpot is the first main game side and the second main game side. The winning probability is the same, and the winning probability increases due to the probability fluctuation game state, whereas the winning probability differs between the first main game side and the second main game side in the small hit. The winning probability is not changed by getting and entering the probability fluctuation game state. (4) As a stop symbol of the symbol variation of the symbol won by the small hit, a "special symbol" dedicated to the small hit winning (for example, ★ such as "2 ★ 2" and "3 ★ 9" correspond to "special symbol") can be stopped), (5) Three of the same symbol as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the symbol variation won in the small hit Specific rolls that are not uniform and are a combination of numbers with a certain regularity (for example, order such as "234", reverse order such as "432", and odd order such as "357". Etc.) can be stopped, (6) The big hit (2R or more, the number of rounds is different) that is the same (or similar) opening mode {visibility) as the small hit from the player's point of view. Seems to be the same opening mode when viewed from the player (small hit is only one round, the big winning opening is opened multiple times in the one round, and the big hit is opened the same number of times as the multiple times. (Executed in a round)} is provided (in such a configuration, it is preferable to stop and display the combination of decorative symbols that is difficult for the player to distinguish between a small hit and a large hit), ( 8) In the second decorative symbol, the "special symbol" dedicated to small hits does not stop (or may not stop), and (9) a combination of decorative symbols that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small hit or a big hit. Even in the configuration in which is stopped and displayed, the ratio of whether the player is a small hit or a big hit differs depending on the type of combination of decorative symbols that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, by aligning three, the probability after the big hit is completed). When a decorative symbol whose transition to the variable gaming state is substantially definite is included in the stop symbol, the probability of being a big hit is higher than when it is not included).

Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) uses the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol). With reference to the symbol lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is related based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). The stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 10R for 7A and 7B. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. However, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) is a lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each gaming state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, FIGS. 12 and 13 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side are based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the main game symbol, the main game time reduction flag state, and the number of holdings at the start of the change. It is configured so that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined. That is, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction game state), it is relative. It is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is short, and when the number of holdings is 2 to 3, the fluctuation time is relatively short as compared with the case where the number of holdings is 0 to 1. It is configured so that the mode can be easily determined (only when it is lost). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side may be configured to be relatively long in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) {the symbol variation on the second main game side. Is configured to be advantageous to the player, and by reducing the symbol variation efficiency of the first main game side, the hold of the second main game side is likely to occur (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}. In addition, in "the effect mode executed on the sub side", an example of the effect executed at the time of selecting each variation mode is shown. In addition, as an effect mode to be executed on the sub side, a pseudo continuous variation described later (an effect in which it seems that a plurality of symbol variations have occurred during one variation display of the main game symbol) is executed. A "pseudo-ream failure effect" may be provided, which is an effect of notifying the player that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is not executed after inciting whether or not the player is injured. In the game state of, the random number distribution (execution frequency) of "pseudo-ream failure effect-> stop of loss" is larger when the number of holds is 0 to 1 than when the number of holds is 2 to 3. (It may be configured in either the non-time-reduced gaming state or the time-reduced gaming state), and when the "pseudo-ream success effect" is executed, the pseudo-continuous to be described later is executed. It may be configured to notify the player that the pseudo continuous variation is executed after inciting the player whether or not the variation is executed. Further, the "pseudo-ream failure effect" and the "pseudo-ream success effect" are effects using a "special symbol" or a specific roll, which will be described later. For example, when the "pseudo-ream failure effect" is executed, "pseudo-ream failure effect" After inciting the player whether or not the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped in the middle row, the decorative symbol one frame after the "special symbol" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle row, and the "pseudo-ream success effect" is displayed. When executed, the effect mode is such that the "special symbol" stops (temporarily stops) in the middle row after inciting the player whether or not the "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row. There is. Further, in order to cause the second main game hold during the change of the first main game symbol in the time shortened game state which is an irregular symbol change, the first main game symbol related to the loss of the time shortened game state is related. The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that the variation mode for a short time is not selected regardless of the number of reservations (for example, the variation time is 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but the first main game in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode. It is the number of game reservations, and in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode, it is the number of second main game reservations.

Next, in step 1414, the game content determination means MN temporarily stores the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Information about the determined main game symbol such as variation mode information and commands related to the current game state) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol to the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. The process proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C fluctuate with reference to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. Determines if the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation ends to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). Stops the variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and displays the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as a fixed stop symbol. Control. Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. ..

Next, in step 1430, the game content determining means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1470, in step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476 and step 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then the next (Processing in step 1500). Even if No in step 1452, step 1470 or step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 has the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction) in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) is turned off. Next, in step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and also turns off the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game executing means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started to the sub-main control unit side (command transmission buffer MT10). In the control command transmission process of step 1999, it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. If No in step 1610, the special game executing means MP33 determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the special game executing means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first large prize opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to win the first large prize. The mouth C10 (or the second big winning mouth C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for the purpose (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is applied to the first winning opening C10 (or the second major winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (ball). If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, if No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening is set. Determine if it has passed. In the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 of the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). The drive is stopped and the first prize opening C10 (or the second prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game executing means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the final round is completed (for example, the round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). (Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is ended to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, in step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (in a probability-variable game state after the execution of the special game is completed). It is a jackpot symbol to be transferred, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1652, that is, if the stop symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the execution of the special game is completed, 4A / 4B in this example), step 1656. Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

Next, in steps 1658 and 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and next processing (step). (1997 processing).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information). When received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, when various information commands are received → Reset the effect-related information at the time of power failure to the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of holds (for example, the drawing hold counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). It should be noted that the effect being executed is not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next fluctuation. After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (b) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed. Here, when (b) is executed, first, in step 2100, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs the hold information management process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. To execute. Next, in step 2200, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the first decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the second decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the background effect control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (S2100 to S2999) are looped after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal), this is the processing flow (c). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM uses the command input port from the main control board M side (when the STB signal line is turned on). Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above). Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM has a command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored and returns to the processing that was being executed immediately before this interrupt processing.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a command (first main game symbol or second main) related to the occurrence of a new hold from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the hold information related to the game symbol) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game). Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the 2nd main game). Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, and the hold information (particularly, the random number value and the hold look-ahead group information related to the main game symbol lottery). ) Is temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2118.

On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2111, did the map reservation information display control means SM22 refer to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receive the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2111, in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the holding information related to the symbol change (particularly, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the marking holding information temporary storage means SM22b. , Shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2116, the map holding information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. Even if No in step 2111, the process proceeds to step 2118.

Next, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is loaded on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display area SG12 and the second hold display area SG13) by making full use of the effect display means SS. Figure Hold information Holds the same number of hold images as the number of hold counter values in the temporary storage means SM22b is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the map display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the map display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) temporarily stores the symbol information (and the symbol information (and the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). The first decorative symbol (as described above, as described above, is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) with reference to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the change in the design. It is a controlled so-called decorative symbol, and the details of its display size and operation content will be described later.) Stop symbol {For example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7.7. Numbers such as "7" (hits), in the case of a lost symbol, numbers such as "1 ・ 3 ・ 5"} and variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short time. If it is fluctuating, it is non-reach, if it is fluctuating for a long time, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined. Related information Temporarily store in the temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and is an effective line (a line capable of notifying the result of success or failure by arranging three numerical symbols). ) Is one line, and if the same number symbols are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). Also, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or only in the middle column), "special symbols" other than the numerical symbols (when displayed on the valid line, it does not mean a big hit, but after that, it is a big hit. It is a symbol that foretells the possibility that Has been done. Note that the temporary stop is to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbols in all rows during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbol to the stop display, and the provisionally stopped and displayed decorative symbols are displayed. , The state in which the variable display can be started again during the relevant period (hereinafter, used in the same meaning). Although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not included in the stop mode in which the temporary stop (provisional stop) is possible, the fixed stop is not performed, and the jackpot is notified. It is configured so that the "special symbol" at the time of executing the look-ahead effect can be temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped), can be fixedly stopped, and is not included in the stop mode for notifying the jackpot. ..

Next, in step 2208, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) temporarily stores the symbol information (and the symbol information (and the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). Refer to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the change in the design, and display control based on the information from the second decorative symbol (as described above, from the main control board M side). It is a so-called decorative symbol, and the details of its display size and operation content will be described later.) Stop symbol {For example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7, 7, 7 , Etc., if it is a missed pattern, the number is different, such as "1, 3, 5"} and the variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol changes for a short time. In the case of non-reach, in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the map display-related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the advance notice effect-related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect-related). Information is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and one effective line (a line in which it is effective to arrange the same numerical symbols) is one line. If the same number symbols are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). In addition, only numerical symbols can be stopped in the left column, middle column, and right column (the "special symbol" does not stop like the first decorative symbol), and it is configured so that it does not temporarily stop during the symbol change. .. In this way, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to independently determine the display content for notifying the propriety of the main game symbol, that is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The decorative symbol has, as its basic property, the property that the result of success or failure related to the main game symbol can be independently notified.

Next, in step 2216, the map display content determining means SM21n is the result of whether or not the main game symbol is temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). Based on the variation mode, the decorative design effect content is determined with reference to the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative pattern effect table 1 to the decorative pattern effect table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the pattern variation. The display update timing and display update contents are set, and the information related to the display of the map is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2218, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (process of step 2300). Transition. Even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300).

In the above description, the main game symbol whose display is controlled on the main control board M side is the one on the first main game side (first main game symbol) or the one on the second main game side (). Although it does not mention whether it is the second main game symbol), basically, even if the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol. Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be determined in correspondence with the second main game symbol, that is, the variable display of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Regardless of which of the variable display is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be made feasible in conjunction with it. However, this is not the case in the time-reduced game state (a state accompanied by a so-called electric support state), for example, in the time-reduced game state, the variation display of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol. Regardless of which of the display is performed, it can be exemplified that only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is in a state in which the variable display can be executed in conjunction with the display.

Here, FIGS. 21 and 22 (decorative pattern effect table 1, decorative pattern effect table 2) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 1, especially when the result of success or failure is a loss. And, it is an example of the decorative design effect table 2, in particular, a part of the case where the winning / failing result is a big hit). In the figure, the first decorative symbol may be simply referred to as the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol may be referred to as the second decorative symbol (the same shall apply hereinafter). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the result of success / failure of the main game symbol (shown in the leftmost column, in this example, "missing" or "big hit") and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). And the variation mode of the second decorative pattern (shown in the second column on the left). In this example, only in the case of "pseudo-ream failure (total production time 30 seconds)" and "super reach (total production time 60 seconds)". Based on the example) and the acquired random value (the random value acquired on the sub-main board SM side, a part of the random value is shown in the left 3rd column), the decorative design effect content (left 4th column). In this example, "main effect A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1", "main effect B-1 (big hit) pseudo-ream", etc.) can be determined. When the decorative design effect content is determined, the "display update timing" and the "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, when the decorative design effect content = "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1", "display update content" = "display update content" = "display update content" = "display update timing" = "at the start of fluctuation (0 seconds later)". It is determined that the figure change starts (all rows of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), and when "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of change", "display update content" = "first drawing temporary stop display". (Left column), the second drawing is hidden. " Then, as will be described later, the "display update content" that has reached the "display update timing" is the first decorative symbol according to the elapsed time related to the fluctuation time of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It will be executed sequentially for each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1" is determined, after all the rows of the first decorative symbol and all the rows of the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, "display update timing" = "start of fluctuation". If the display of the first decorative symbol is controlled so that all columns are hidden (even if the variable display is not displayed) until "12 seconds later" is reached, the second decorative symbol is displayed. , The display is controlled so that all columns are displayed in a variable manner (the state of the variable display can be visually recognized), and when "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation" is reached, the first decorative symbol is displayed. With respect to, the display is controlled so that only the left column is stopped, while the display of the second decorative symbol is controlled so that all columns are hidden (even if the variable display is not displayed). .. As described above, the basic operation in the example of this example is that when the first decorative symbol is visible (easy to see) to the player, the second decorative symbol is visible to the player. When the first decorative symbol is invisible to the player (difficult to see) while it is invisible (difficult to see), the second decorative symbol is visible to the player (difficult to see). The second decorative symbol is configured to be displayed in a complementary manner in order to ensure that the player is in a state of being easily visible), that is, notifying the player that the symbol is changing. It should be noted that the effect pattern (a series of display contents) defined in "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1" is different from the effect pattern defined by the name of another decorative pattern effect content (that is, the display content is different). ) It should be added that it is a thing. Further, the range of the random number value is "0 to 1023" in all the variation modes, and this figure is an excerpt of a part of the random number range in the map variation mode (hence, corresponds to a certain map variation mode). The random number range of the acquired random number value to be obtained and the random number range of the acquired random number value corresponding to the map variation mode different from the certain map variation mode are different from each other, but both are "0 to 1023". It will be in the range).

Here, in the present embodiment, the so-called pseudo-continuous variation is configured to be feasible, and specifically, the decorative symbol production contents "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1" and "A-2" in this example. (Loss) Pseudo-ren 2 "," B-2 (Big hit) Pseudo-ren 2 ". For example, in the decorative pattern production content "A-2 (missing) pseudo-ream 2", "display update content" = "design change start (first)" at "display update timing" = "at the start of fluctuation (0 seconds later)". After "1 (1 decorative symbol and all rows of 2nd decorative symbol)" is executed, "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "13 seconds after the start of fluctuation", and "14 seconds after the start of fluctuation" Display update contents "=" Temporary stop display of the first design (left column) "(the left column of the first decorative symbol is the stop display)," Temporary stop display of the first design (right column) "(the first decorative symbol The right column is a stop display), and the "first design special symbol temporary stop display" (the middle column of the first decorative symbol is a stop display at the above-mentioned "special symbol") is executed in sequence. After that, at "display update timing" = "15 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "start of fluctuation of the first design (all rows)" (only the first decorative symbol is displayed again in all rows). After execution, in "display update timing" = "26 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after the start of fluctuation", and "28 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first drawing temporary stop display (1st drawing temporary stop display) "Left column)" (the left column of the first decorative symbol is the stop display), "1st decorative symbol temporary stop display (right column)" (the right column of the 1st decorative symbol is the stop display), "1st decorative symbol special symbol" By sequentially executing the "temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the above-mentioned "special symbol"), the player can see the first variation of the main game symbol during one variation display. As for one decorative pattern, it seems that the pattern has changed multiple times.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is hidden (a state in which the stop display / variable display is not displayed), and the middle row of the first decorative symbol is the above-mentioned "special symbol". The second decorative symbol is varied and displayed when it is temporarily stopped, and in other cases, the second decorative symbol is hidden. That is, when the player can visually recognize the first decorative symbol or can determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is hidden (the first decorative symbol). (Because there is no hindrance to the progress of the game by displaying only), when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or when it is not possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the "special symbol" is stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) are indistinguishable}, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, so that the player always has one of them. The decorative symbol (either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the "special symbol" does not temporarily stop, but this makes it difficult to grasp the progress of the game with respect to the first decorative symbol, and is interesting in terms of production. Since the main purpose is to increase the number of cards, the second decorative symbol provided to ensure that the progress of the game can be easily grasped is a "special symbol" (that is, if it is displayed on the effective line, a big hit is given. This is because it is configured not to display a symbol that may make it difficult to grasp the progress of the game, such as a symbol (a symbol that foretells that a big hit may occur after that), although it does not mean it. In the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), a state in which the variable display is performed at high speed (a variable state in which an afterimage can be seen) may be included. In the case of the "display" (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the display is fluctuating at a low speed (in the case of a display mode that fluctuates from top to bottom, slowly from the top). And (provisional) a fluctuating state toward the planned stop position) may be included.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so as not to temporarily stop during the fluctuation (and the "special symbol" does not stop), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second decorative symbol is also included. Similar to the first decorative symbol, it may be configured so that it can be temporarily stopped (and pseudo-variation can occur) during the fluctuation. That is, in such a configuration, all the rows of the first decorative symbol and all the rows of the second decorative symbol have substantially the same operation contents of the variable display and the stop display (including the temporary stop), and the stop display is displayed. The types of symbols will be different.

Further, the second decorative symbol does not need to be always displayed during the variable display of the main game symbol, and the display condition and display mode of the second decorative symbol may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) a specific effect is being generated (instead of making the first decorative symbol invisible, the effect is such that a movie moving image is reproduced using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or a so-called effect. The second decorative pattern is displayed (2) at the time of a specific reach effect (No. 1) 1 Instead of making the decorative design invisible, it is time to execute a reach effect in which the expectation of a big hit is remarkably increased. For example, the display content of the effect performed on the effect display device SG is forcibly suspended. The second decorative symbol is displayed only when the so-called freeze reach effect is executed, and the second decorative symbol is hidden in other reach effects (especially when the reach effect with low jackpot expectation is executed). 3) The appearance position of the second decorative symbol on the effect display device SG is changed according to the effect pattern (for example, the above-mentioned movable accessory for effect advances to a state of obscuring the display area on the effect display device SG. In the case of such an effect, it can be moved to the display area on the effect display device SG that is not obscured by the movable accessory for this effect), and (4) the first decorative pattern can be moved / reduced / enlarged. On the other hand, with respect to the second decorative symbol, the probability that the movement / reduction / enlargement display cannot be executed, or the movement / reduction / enlargement display is executed, the movement width, the reduction ratio, the enlargement ratio, etc. are the first decorative symbols. It may be lower than, etc.

The second decorative symbol changes during a specific reach effect or in a situation where the first decorative symbol forms a reach state (for example, the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped at the same symbol). It may be configured as displayed.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. Even if No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 first decorates the first decoration based on the first decoration variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start timing of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the first decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ), And the process proceeds to step 2330.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2314, in step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has a variation mode temporarily stored in the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the above-mentioned "special symbol" ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only at the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is in the flag area of the temporary storage means SM21b for information related to the display of the design, and the angel zone flag (to notify that the jackpot expectation is increased). The flag that triggers the display of the background image) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2324. On the other hand, even if No in step 2320, the process proceeds to step 2324. Next, in step 2324, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the first decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ), And the process proceeds to step 2330. In the present embodiment, the "angel zone background" is displayed as a background effect by turning on the angel zone flag. However, as the timing when the angel zone flag is turned on, for example, , (1) During symbol fluctuations with relatively high jackpot expectations (for example, symbol fluctuations that reach), (2) When the symbol fluctuations related to the hold of the digestion schedule stop before the symbol fluctuations with high jackpot expectations. And so on. Further, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to be turned on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or in the case of (2) described above. It may be fixedly stopped.

On the other hand, if No in step 2318, in step 2326, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) is the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in (and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the advance notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Even if No in step 2326, the process proceeds to step 2330.

Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative symbol is normally displayed (the above-mentioned player visually recognizes the first decorative symbol). It is determined whether or not it is obtained or it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol (when the second decorative symbol is hidden). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the second symbol display flag (the second decorative symbol is in a non-display state) in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. (Flag for switching between on = off and display state = on) is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2330, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. ..

Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means). With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2336, in step 2338, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the first decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 2340, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2342, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2350). do. Even if No in step 2310 or 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2350).

In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM manages the timing related to the variation display of the first decorative symbol, the execution timing of the background effect, and the like by using the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. However, the management method such as the timing related to the change of the first decorative symbol and the execution timing of the background effect is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display content determination process in step 2200. All the contents such as timing, preview image / reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS follows the received contents. The effect may be executed (displayed) at any time at the same timing (the same applies to the second decorative symbol).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol display flag is on. .. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a second decorative symbol variable display execution command (command for variable display of the second decorative symbol) (transmission of the display command in step 2999). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360. On the other hand, if No in step 2354, in step 2358, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for erasing the variable display of the second decorative symbol (command for hiding the second decorative symbol) (in step 2999). Display command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the transmission control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360.

Next, in step 2360, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means). With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the second decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 2364, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (process of step 2400). Transition. Even if No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the hold display (the hold for the first main game symbol and the hold for the second main game symbol may be displayed at the same time) are the effect display devices. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, and in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the final display timing (the timing when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed), and the game progresses. Since the first decorative symbol is the main decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol has higher visibility than the second decorative symbol (the displayed area is assumed to be larger). Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing (confirmed display timing) of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the same timing.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406 and step 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and also turns on the effect display device. The jackpot start display is displayed on the SG (displayed appropriately based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 2412. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2412.

Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game playability and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type, etc.).

Next, in step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display an effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the current jackpot and the stopped jackpot symbol ( It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999 (for example, in the case of a special game related to the latent probability variation jackpot symbol, it is decided to shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the special game ends. A production that cannot be recognized by the player is performed). Next, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the end of the big hit on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of the big hit). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2500). .. Even if No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the angel zone flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "angel zone background" (background effect that can be displayed triggered by the temporary stop of the "special symbol") as the background effect, and step 2506. Move to. Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the fluctuation (a part of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) that triggered the transition of the "angel zone" is completed. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the "angel zone background" was set), and proceeds to step 2520. do.

On the other hand, if No in step 2502, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. .. In step 2512, in the case of Yes, in step 2514, a stage transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/20 in this example) is executed (the stage transition lottery is executed at the start of each fluctuation). .. Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 shifts to loop each stage in the order of a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, flat ground stage → space stage → volcano stage → flat ground stage). Based on (Iku), the background effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. In addition, even if No in step 2506, step 2512 or step 2516, the process proceeds to step 2520.

Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side is set. It is transmitted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided, and the first decorative symbol is hidden (stopped). By configuring the second decorative symbol to be displayed (variable display) in a situation where the display / variable display is not displayed) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the player always displays one of the decorative symbols. It can be a user-friendly gaming machine that can be visually recognized and can accurately determine whether or not a stopped symbol or a jackpot symbol is stopped.

(Example 1 of change from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the "special symbol" is always stopped for the temporary stop symbol in the middle row, and the variation display of the first decorative symbol is always the first. 2 The decorative symbol is configured to be hidden, but the display control method of the decorative symbol is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a change example 1 from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 27 and 28 (decorative pattern effect table 3 and decorative pattern effect table 4) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 3, in particular, a part of the case where the result of success or failure is a loss, and , A decorative design effect table 4, in particular, a part of the case where the result of success or failure is a big hit). First, the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the first decorative design. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured to be displayed even during the change. Further, for example, at the time of executing pseudo continuous fluctuation such as "A-6 (missing) pseudo-ream 2 (specific roll)", the specific roll is stopped in addition to the "special symbol" at the temporary stop timing of the middle symbol. It is configured to be possible. Here, unlike the "special symbol", the specific roll is a roll in which all columns (left column, middle column, right column) are stopped by numbers, but the stop mode is according to a certain rule. (For example, the order is "345" or the like), and it is configured to notify the player that the pseudo continuous variation is being executed by stopping the specific roll. Further, in the change example 1 from the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, in the case of a loss, the specific roll is more likely to stop at the temporary stop timing of the middle row than the "special symbol". On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than the specific roll at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, that is, the "special symbol" is easier than when the specific roll is stopped. The expectation that it will be a big hit is higher when it stops. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if it is configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the specific roll is stopped than when the "special symbol" is stopped. Further, when the pseudo-variation is executed in the pseudo-continuous variation, all the symbols are re-variated, that is, the three symbols are re-variated after the three symbols are temporarily stopped. In such a case, the three symbols are re-variated. , If the "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row and then re-changes, the decorative symbol in the middle row at the start of the re-variation is no longer a "special symbol" {for example, "6 ★ 7" "(★ = special symbol), it will change again in the state of" 667 "(the middle symbol is preferably the symbol of the" ± 1 "frame of the right symbol or the left symbol)} When the "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row, the three symbols "667" are temporarily stopped behind the "special symbol", and then the "special symbol" changes again. When erased, the first decorative symbol in the left column, the first decorative symbol in the middle column, and the first decorative symbol in the right column may be configured to change again. In such a case, by setting the display priority of the image of the "special symbol" in the middle row higher than that of the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the "special symbol" is set as the mode of the pseudo-continuous variation to display the specific result. Since it is only necessary to display it, it is possible to prevent the method of determining the first decorative pattern from becoming complicated.

Next, the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the second decorative design. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured to be always displayed while the main game symbol is changing. In the case of reach, the second decorative symbol is also temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is also confirmed and displayed at the same time at the final display timing of the first decorative symbol. (The same symbol will be stopped and displayed for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). The variable display mode of the second decorative symbol is not limited to this, and for example, the first decorative symbol can be visually recognized, and the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. In that case, the second decorative symbol is hidden, that is, the specific roll is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative symbol, the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped, and the middle column is temporarily stopped. If it is inside, the second decorative symbol is hidden, while if the "special symbol" is stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner (or provisionally). It may be configured to be a stop display). Further, it may be configured to stop and temporarily stop all the second decorative symbols in accordance with the stop and temporary stop of the first decorative symbol. Further, the second decorative symbol may be configured to always be displayed in a variable manner regardless of the fluctuation status of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol may also be fixedly stopped only when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the present embodiment, the quasi-continuous fluctuation is configured so that the specific roll can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row. By providing a plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop at the time of execution and different expectations for big hits depending on the stop mode, the player pays attention to which of the stop modes is. Therefore, the fun of the game will increase.

In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol is being executed during a specific effect such as during a reach effect. May be configured not to be variablely displayed (hidden), or only a specific column (for example, the middle column) may be hidden.

In addition, in the change example 1 from this embodiment, the specific roll (or "special symbol") is configured to be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, but the specific roll (or "special symbol") is configured. ) May be displayed in the left column and the right column. For example, (1) the left column and the right column are the same number, and the middle column is ± 1 of the same number. (For example, "4, 5, 4" or "special symbol" is arranged at the position of 5 in the middle row), (2) In the same stop mode as the lost eye that is not a specific result. However, there is a change in sound or color to notify that it is a specific result, (3) temporary stop in all rows at the same time, (4) numbers in the left column and / or right column are temporary stop timings in the middle row. Change, (5) If the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are separated by "2" or more, the decorative symbols in the middle column are separated from the left and / or right columns by "2" or more. In case of temporary stop due to loss, etc., it may be done. In addition, the appearance condition of a specific roll may be changed, for example, it is likely to appear when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left column and the right column are the same (or appear only when they are the same). For example, it may be configured to be different from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, the appearance of a "special symbol" (or a specific roll) after the reach has a higher expectation of a big hit than the appearance of a "special symbol" (or a specific roll) when it is not a reach. After that, there is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will temporarily stop again during the symbol change {for example, "7 ★ 7" has a higher expectation of a big hit than "7 ★ 8" (★ = special symbol). Alternatively, it may be configured so that there is a high possibility that it will be temporarily stopped again. In addition, when the left column and the right column are the same number as shown in (1) and the middle column is the number ± 1 of the same number, or the middle column and the right column are the numbers in the left column. When numbers such as ± 1 and ± 2, that is, when the numbers in the middle and right columns are predetermined numbers based on the numbers in the left column, only the numbers displayed in the left column are determined by lottery, etc. The numbers displayed in the middle and right columns should be ± 1 or ± 2 with respect to the same numbers displayed in the left column determined by the lottery or the numbers displayed in the left column determined by the lottery. (That is, the numbers to be displayed in the middle and right columns are not determined by lottery, etc., but the numbers corresponding to the numbers to be displayed in the left column are determined). For example, when the left column is N (N is a number from 1 to 8, for example), the middle column is N + 1, and the right column is N, the number to be displayed in the left column is determined from 1 to 8 by lottery or the like. .. If the number in the left column is determined to be "4", the middle column will be 4 + 1 = "5", the right column will be the same "4" as the left column, and "4, 5, 4" will be the specific result. Set. By configuring in this way, the specific rolls are set using the table in which only the numbers in the left column are set, without using the table in which multiple specific rolls that are a combination of the left column, the middle column, and the right column are set. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the determination of a specific result in the decorative symbol display content determination process of step 2200. In addition, although the case where the numbers in the left column are determined by lottery and the numbers in the middle column and the right column are determined based on the numbers in the left column is illustrated, the numbers in the middle column or the right column are determined by lottery, etc. In the case of the numbers in the columns, the numbers in the left and right columns may be determined, and in the case of the numbers in the right column, the numbers in the left and middle columns may be determined.

(Example 2 of change from this embodiment)
Here, the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative symbol at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation is given in the present embodiment and the modification 1 from the present embodiment, but the configuration of the first decorative symbol at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation other than the configuration is given. It is possible to create new playability by configuring the display mode. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a modification 2 from the present embodiment, and the changes to the modification 1 from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 29 and 30 (decorative pattern effect table 5, decorative pattern effect table 6) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 5, in particular, a part of the case where the result of success or failure is a loss, and , A decorative design effect table 6, in particular, a part of the case where the result of success or failure is a big hit). First, the first decorative design will be described in detail as to the changes from the first modification from the present embodiment. In the second modification from the present embodiment, the "special symbols" that are displayed during the fluctuation and can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation are "special symbol A" and "special symbol A". There are two types, "Special Symbol B". Here, the "special symbol A" is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (even after that timing), while the "special symbol B" is configured to be pseudo continuous. It is configured so that the temporary stop can be performed from the temporary stop timing of the second middle row in the fluctuation. Further, the specific roll is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped from (even after that timing) the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. That is, in the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, two types of "special symbol A" and the specific output can be temporarily stopped as the stop mode, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation can be temporarily stopped. In the temporary stop timing of, as the stop mode, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" and three types of specific rolls can be temporarily stopped, and the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is configured. There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation than at the temporary stop timing. As described above, in the temporary stop timing of the middle row of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the number of types of stop modes may be increased as the temporary stop timing in the latter half is reached, or the types of stop modes may be increased as the temporary stop timing in the latter half is reached. May be configured to be less. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes increases as the temporary stop timing in the latter half is reached, a stop mode with a high expectation that the change becomes a big hit as a type of selection candidate each time a pseudo change is executed is used. It may be configured to be newly added, and by such a configuration, the player pays attention to each time the pseudo-variation is executed. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the temporary stop timing in the latter half is reached, a stop mode with a low expectation that the change becomes a big hit as a type of selection candidate each time a pseudo change is executed is used. It may be configured to be deleted, and by configuring it in such a configuration, it is possible to guarantee the degree of expectation that the fluctuation will be a big hit each time the pseudo fluctuation is executed. Since the second decorative design has the same configuration as that of the first modification from the present embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, the temporary stop timing can be temporarily stopped as the temporary stop timing becomes the latter half at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. By configuring so that the number of stopping modes increases, the player pays attention to the number of times the middle row temporarily stops and the stopping mode at the time of the temporary stop, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

(Example 3 of change from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed (stop display / variable display is not displayed). The second decorative symbol is displayed (variable display) in a state) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, but the configuration using the second decorative symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a modification 3 from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2232 (variant 3) to step 2236 (variant 3), step 2900 (variant 3), step 2246 (variant 3) and step 2248 (variant 3), that is, step 2204. Then, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2232 (variation 3), the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the current gaming state is a probability fluctuation gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2232 (variation 3), in step 2234 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n displays the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a probabilistic display mode (during the probability variation game state). The display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed in the above) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variation 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2232 (variation 3), in step 2236 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n displays the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a non-probable variable display mode (variable 3). The display mode of the decorative symbol to be displayed during the non-probability variation game state) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variation 3). As described above, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to be different depending on whether or not the game is in the probability-variable gaming state, and the first decoration is used. When the display mode of the symbol changes (for example, when the non-probability variable gaming state is changed to the stochastic variable gaming state), the display mode of the second decorative symbol is also configured to change with the change. The display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not limited to a configuration that differs only depending on whether or not the game is in the probability-variable gaming state. It may be configured to differ depending on which production (production stage) is, and the like.

Next, in step 2900 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n executes a marking stop symbol determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2246 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2248 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to step 2216.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (variation 3) in FIG. 31 in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, in step 2902, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the number of rounds executed in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is the maximum number of rounds ( In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 10R). In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the marking display content determining means SM21n has three sets of the first decorative symbol and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol as "white" symbols (for example, "777") and Determined to be one of the three sets of "black" symbols (for example, "444") (the three sets of "white" symbols are selected. The total distribution rate and the three sets of "black" symbols are selected. Is 1: 1 with the total distribution ratio selected), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the marking display content determining means SM21n has three "black" symbols for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (for example, "444"). It is determined to be one of the above, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. As described above, in the change example 3 from the present embodiment, the three sets of "white" symbols (for example, "777") are in the case of a special game in which the maximum number of rounds (10R in this example) is obtained. It is configured so that it can only be stopped, that is, when the three sets of white symbols are stopped, it is almost certain that the special game with the maximum number of rounds (10R in this example) is executed. (It may be a relatively high profit for the player than the three sets of "black" symbols).

On the other hand, if No in step 2902, in step 2910, the marking display content determining means SM1n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2912, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol to a predetermined lost symbol (in this example, "345", and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol is only one pattern. Is determined), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. The type of the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol does not have to be only one pattern, but it is desirable that the number is less than the type of the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. Further, the stop symbol when the second decorative symbol is lost is a predetermined lost symbol (“345” in this example), whereas the stop symbol when the first decorative symbol is lost is selected from a plurality of candidates. (For example, it is randomly selected from 300 types of stop symbol candidates), so that the frequency at which the predetermined lost symbol is stopped at the time of loss is higher in the second decorative symbol than in the first decorative symbol (for example). As a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol, a predetermined lost symbol may be configured so as not to stop). In addition, all the lost symbols that can be stopped in the second decorative symbol (for example, only one pattern of "375" may be used) are the highest for the player in any of the gaming states when three identical symbols are aligned. It may be configured to always include one or more profitable symbols (eg, "7" symbol) (eg, "375" and "276" may stop).

Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram relating to the display mode of the decorative pattern in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are used depending on whether the gaming state is the non-probability variable gaming state or the stochastic variable gaming state. It is configured so that the display mode (in this example, it is a display color and is a display attribute such as a color arrangement pattern, a shape, a size, etc.) can be different. Specifically, in the non-probability variable gaming state, only the "7" symbol is displayed in "white" together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and all the symbols other than "7" are displayed as "white". While it is configured to be displayed in "black" (in a non-probable variation display mode), in the case of a probability fluctuation gaming state, "3" symbol and "7" are displayed together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbols are displayed in "white", and all the symbols other than "3" and "7" are displayed in "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured so that the display mode may differ depending on the gaming state (the display mode is a probable variable display mode). The conditions under which the display mode is different are not limited to whether or not the game is in the probability-variable gaming state, and may be whether or not the game is in the time-reduced gaming state, and differ depending on which background effect (effect stage) is being executed. It may be configured to be possible. In addition, in the change example 3 from this embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can change depending on whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation gaming state is the “3” symbol, but the “3” symbol is described above. It is included in the combination of the predetermined lost symbols (in this example, "345") in which the second decorative symbol is stopped at the time of loss (it becomes the stopped symbol in the left column), and is in the non-probability variable gaming state. Is displayed in "black" for all the stop symbols of the second decorative symbol at the time of loss, while in the probability fluctuation game state, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol at the time of loss is "white" from the left column. , "Black", "Black" will be displayed. In this figure, the configuration is based on a comparison between the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state, but this is a configuration based on a comparison between the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. There may be (the non-probability variable gaming state in this figure may be a non-probability variable gaming state, and the probabilistic variable gaming state may be a time-reduced gaming state), a non-time-reduced gaming state and a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-shortening game. The configuration may be based on comparison with the state and the probability-variable gaming state (the non-probability-variable gaming state in this figure is defined as the non-time-shortening gaming state and the non-probability-variable gaming state, and the probability-variable gaming state is the time-shortening gaming state. It may be a state and a probability fluctuation game state). It should be noted that such a comparative fit substitution is applicable to all configurations such as any of the embodiments and modifications of the present case.

Next, FIGS. 34 and 35 (decorative pattern effect table 7, decorative pattern effect table 8) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 7, especially when the result of success or failure is a loss. And, it is an example of the decorative design effect table 8, in particular, a part of the case where the winning / failing result is a big hit). The change from this embodiment is that the item of the decorative symbol type is set as the display update type, and three items of "first decorative symbol", "second decorative symbol" and "transmissive liquid crystal" are provided. In the third modification from the present embodiment, the transparent effect that the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent is configured to be executable, and the period during which the transparent effect is executed is the first decorative symbol. Is hidden, but the second decorative symbol is displayed (see "33 seconds" of the display update timing).

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2327-1 (variant 3) and step 2327-2 (variant 3), that is, when the notice image or reach image display timing is reached in step 2326, step 2327-. In 1 (variation 3), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 is a transparent effect (effect) based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the effect) that the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transparent. In the case of Yes in step 2327-1 (variant 3), in step 2327-2 (variant 3), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets an image display command related to the transparent effect (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2327-1 (variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2328. When the transparent effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transmitted, and the state in which the accessory in the effect display device SG is being driven can be visually recognized, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Is erased (hidden), and the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed by the second decorative symbol display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). Further, in the third modification from the present embodiment, a hold number display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol of the effect display device SG (to the right when viewed from the player). With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the number of reservations even while the transparent effect is being executed.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in the third modification from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 2410 (variation 3), that is, after setting the command related to the jackpot display in step 2408, or when the special gaming flag is on, step 2410 (change). In variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command (for example, "777" continues to stop) to continuously display the second decorative symbol from the time when the jackpot symbol related to the special game is stopped (step). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2412. As described above, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed even during the execution of the special game, and the player can use which decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It is possible to determine whether or not the special game is being executed even during the special game.

Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in the third modification from the present embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and the conceptual top view of the effect display device, a second decorative symbol display device is provided on the back side (as viewed from the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light (light emission). The light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), so that the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Further, although the effect can be displayed in the display area SG10 by outputting the light from the light source, the effect is not displayed in the area of the display area SG10 adjacent to the second decorative symbol display device, and the effect is not displayed. The display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area by the decorative symbol display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transparent effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is not displayed, and the accessory inside the effect display device SG can be visually recognized. Since the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device is executed even during the execution of the transparent effect, it is visible to the player. With this configuration, the player can recognize the change status of the decorative symbol and the number of holdings by visually recognizing the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device even in the situation where the transparent effect is executed. Become. The type of hold to be displayed may be different depending on the game state (for example, the first main game hold number is displayed in the non-time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state is displayed. (Displays the number of 2nd main game hold), the number of 1st main game hold and the number of 2nd main game hold may always be displayed, or the total of the number of 1st main game hold and the number of 2nd main game hold. It may be configured to display the number of holds. The configuration for displaying the effect on the display area SG10 is not limited to this, and the display area SG10 may be configured to be switched between a transparent state and a non-transparent state. For example, the position of the light source may be changed. A light guide plate (a transmissive plate-shaped member that vertically scatters light emitted from a light emitting element incident from a side surface) may be used (for example, light is output from diagonally behind the display area). It may be a display area (so-called edge light type) for displaying through, a display area made of an organic EL, or the like. As a configuration example using the light source plate, when viewed from the player side, a "transmissive liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)" and a "light source plate {arranged close to the light source liquid source (about 5 mm) are provided, and the light source plate is concerned. A light source A for distributing light to the light guide plate is arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the light source} ”,“ A light source B that constantly outputs light in the lower left of the display area SG10 ”,“ Auxiliary ”, When arranging in the order of "light source C for emphasizing an object and showing it to the player" and executing a transmission effect (when you want to emphasize an object and show it to the player), the output of the light source A is turned off (light source). The output of A may be reduced compared to when the transmission effect is not executed), the outputs of the light source B and the light source C are turned on, and the transmission effect is not executed (I do not want to show the character to the player, and I do not want to show the character to the player. When the player wants to show the effect in the display area SG10), the outputs of the light source A and the light source B are turned on, and the output of the light source C is turned off (the output of the light source C is reduced as compared with the time when the transmission effect is executed). It may be configured to be). Further, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area is not limited to the configuration of this example, and for example, when the second decorative symbol display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10). The second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area can be displayed in the display area SG10 by the same mechanism as the mechanism in which the effect is displayed by outputting the light from the light source to the display area SG10, that is, Even if the second decorative symbol display device replaces the light source and the transmission effect is executed and the light source stops outputting light, the second decorative symbol display device constantly outputs light, so that the second decorative symbol is output. And the display of the hold number display area may be configured to be always visible (the light source plate is used to prevent the transmissive liquid crystal from transmitting).

Next, FIG. 39 is a transmission effect execution image diagram in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. In this example, the pseudo continuous variation is executed twice in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state) (variation of pseudo-ream 2), and one symbol variation is executed. The case is illustrated. First, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped as the first temporary stop symbol in the middle row. After that, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started again, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stop symbol. After that, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started again, and the display area SG10 becomes a transparent state due to the transmission effect being executed, and the back of the display area SG10 (game). The state in which the character in (from the person's point of view) is being driven becomes visible to the player. After that, the transparency effect ends (the display area SG10 becomes non-transparent), the accessory in the back of the display area SG10 (as seen from the player) becomes invisible, and the variation display of the first decorative symbol is displayed again. It becomes visible (displayed). After that, in the case of loss, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the lost symbol {the second decorative symbol stops at the predetermined lost symbol (“345”), and the first decorative symbol It is a combination of stop symbols that can be different from the lost symbol ("787")}. In the case of a big hit, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the jackpot symbol {the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol and the jackpot symbol of the second decorative symbol have the same combination of stop symbols. Is}. After that, the special game is executed, and even during the execution of the special game, the second decorative symbol continues to be stopped and displayed with the same jackpot symbol as at the start of the special game. It should be noted that the transparency effect may be executed even during the special game execution (the display area SG10 may be in the transparent state). By configuring the transparent effect to be executed immediately before the execution, the player can raise the expectation of shifting to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game by visually recognizing the transparent effect. Even if the transparency effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area is maintained (because it is visible), so that the progress of the game is not hindered. It is configured as. As an example of displaying decorative symbols during a special game, for example, during a special game, only one of the aligned symbols is displayed in order to notify the player which three decorative symbols are aligned and become a big hit. (For example, if a big hit is made with "777", "7" is displayed), and when the transparent effect is executed, the display of the aligned symbols becomes invisible, so that the player can see the aligned symbols. In order to make it recognizable, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area may be maintained even during the special game.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the staging display device SG is in a transparent state, and the accessory in the staging display device SG can be visually recognized. Since the effect is configured to be executable and the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device is executed even if the first decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of the transparent effect, the player can use the second decorative symbol. By visually recognizing the effect display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the change status of the decorative symbol and the number of holdings, and it is possible to make the game machine more user-friendly. In addition, the game state transition distribution rate after the end of the special game related to the entry into the first main game start port A10 and the game state transition distribution after the end of the special game related to the entry into the second main game start port B10. It is possible to suggest or notify the player that the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) are highly profitable by differentiating the rates and different display attributes of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) depending on whether or not the game is in a probability-variable gaming state. By making the number of types of symbols different, the game ball is inserted into the first main game start port A10 to advance the game, rather than the non-probability variable game state in which the game ball is entered into the second main game start port B10. In the probability-variable game state in which the player enters the ball and the game progresses, the number of types of display attributes of the jackpot symbol in which the transition to the probability-variable game state is almost definite after the end of the special game is increased, and now It is possible to appropriately suggest or notify the player whether or not the gaming state of the above is highly profitable for the player.

Further, in the change example 3 from the present embodiment, the current game state and the effect display mode (background effect, etc.) correspond to any change of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The decorative symbol of the display attribute is variablely displayed, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the change of the first main game symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the change of the second main game symbol are displayed in common (and the display attribute). (The display attribute and the display area of the decorative symbol are not differentiated between the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol).

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, game parts (also referred to as front parts of the game board) in the game board D35 of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. First, the direction will be explained. As shown in FIG. 40 (a), when the game board D35 is viewed from the front, the vertical direction is the Y axis and the horizontal direction is the X axis. Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the vertical direction is the Y-axis and the left-right direction is the Z-axis when the surface of the game board D35 to which the game component is attached is turned to the left. Then, in (a) of FIG. 40, the upper part is the Y direction + (plus), the lower part is the Y direction- (minus), the right side is the X direction + (plus), and the left side is the X direction- (minus). In (b), the top is in the Y direction + (plus), the bottom is in the Y direction- (minus), the front (left in the figure) is in the Z direction + (plus), and the back (right in the figure) is in the Z direction. -(Minus).

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the center decoration D38 as a game component is screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. Screw (small screw) BS1, screw BS2, screw BS5, screw BS8, screw BS11 , Screw BS12, screw BS13, etc., are attached to substantially the center of the front surface of the game board D35. The game parts attached to the front surface of the game board D35 are not limited to the center decoration D38, and the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the auxiliary game start port H10, and the first big prize. Mouth C10, 2nd big winning opening C20, left general winning opening P10, right general winning opening P20, out opening D36, outer rail D32, inner rail D34, ball return prevention member D39, main display device MH20 (1st main game symbol) The display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20), the sub display device SH20, etc. may be used, and these game parts use screws screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30 as in the center decoration D38. , It is attached to the front surface of the game board D35. Further, on the rear surface of the game board D35, a movable accessory YK, a back unit (not shown) to which the effect display device SG is attached, and a discharge flow path for discharging the game balls that have entered various winning openings to the outside. (Not shown) is attached. The discharge flow path may be provided in the back unit. Further, although the example in which the center decoration D38 is attached to the game board D35 is shown, it may be configured to be attached to the back unit instead of the game board D35, and the center decoration D38 is configured to be arranged in the game area D30. You just have to do it.

The first main game start port A10 is attached to the game board D35 by using a screw BS9, a screw BS14, or the like screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. Although not shown, the second main game start port B10 is attached to the game board D35 by using a screw screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. Although not shown, the auxiliary game start port H10 is attached to the game board D35 by using a screw screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. The first large winning opening C10 is attached to the game board D35 by using a screw BS15, a screw BS16, or the like screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. The second large winning opening C20 is attached to the game board D35 by using a screw BS15, a screw BS16, or the like screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. The left general winning opening P10 is attached to the game board D35 using a screw BS6, a screw BS7, or the like screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. The right general winning opening P20 is attached to the game board D35 by using a screw BS15, a screw BS16, or the like screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. Although not shown, the out port D36 is attached to the game board D35 using a screw screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. Although not shown, the outer rail D32 is attached to the game board D35 using a screw screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. Although not shown, the inner rail D34 is attached to the game board D35 using a screw screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. The ball return prevention member D39 is attached to the game board D35 by using a screw BS3, a screw BS4, or the like screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. Although not shown, the main display device MH20 is attached to the game board D35 using a screw screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. The sub-display device SH20 is attached to the game board D35 by using a screw BS6, a screw BS7, or the like screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30.

FIG. 40 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 40 (a). As shown in this figure, the center decoration D38 has an eaves portion (predetermined portion) D38-1 on which the launched game ball can roll on the upper surface (upper surface) of the upper region of the front view. The eaves D38-1 is located in the first region of the gaming area D30, and has an inclined surface (inclined downward toward the front) so as to descend from the rear side to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine. There is. The eaves D38-1 may be any upper surface (upper surface) of the upper region of the center decoration D38 located in the range of the first region, and a part or all of the upper surface thereof corresponds to the eaves D38-1. The eaves D38-1 may be a portion of the upper surface of the center decoration D38 that is inclined toward the front, or may be an arbitrary range of the upper surface of the center decoration D38. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface of the eaves D38-1 is α degrees (an angle larger than 90 degrees, for example, 95 degrees, from the rear side) with respect to the game board D35 as shown in FIG. 40 (b). Inclination of 5 degrees downward toward the front side. In other words, the Z axis on the Z direction + side is displaced 5 degrees from the intersection of the Z axis and the Y axis toward the Y axis in the Y direction.) There is. On the other hand, the angle of inclination of the lower surface of the eaves D38-1 is β degrees (an angle smaller than 90 degrees, for example, 85 degrees β degrees) with respect to the game board D35 as shown in FIG. 40 (b). = 180 degrees-α degrees). The pachinko gaming machine itself is installed on the game island so as to incline from the front side to the rear side (for example, a one-degree inclination going down from the front side to the rear side), but the inclined surface of the eaves D38-1. The inclination of the pachinko machine itself is an inclination from the front side to the rear side (for example, a one-degree inclination that descends from the front side to the rear side. In other words, the Z axis on the Z direction + side is the intersection of the Z axis and the Y axis. Even if the Y-axis + is displaced once toward the Y-axis), the inclination is such that the inclination is downward from the rear side to the front side (for example, the inclination is 4 degrees downward from the rear side to the front side). In other words, the Z-axis on the + side of the Z-direction is displaced 4 degrees from the intersection of the Z-axis and the Y-axis toward the Y-axis in the Y-direction.) Therefore, when the game ball launched to the first area of the game area D30 is launched to the target and the game ball launched to the game area D30 is placed on the inclined surface of the eaves portion D38-1, the game ball is launched from the rear side. It is configured to be able to roll (flow down) toward the front side.

Here, when the pachinko gaming machine provided with the center decoration D38 in the game area D30 is installed on the game island in a state of being tilted from the front side to the rear side, the game ball flowing down the game area D30 stays on the center decoration D38. If a situation occurs and the flow of other pachinko balls is obstructed, the game cannot be played, which is one of the factors that impair the interest of the player's game.

In order to solve such a problem, a center decoration D38 is provided at a predetermined position (substantially center) of the game area D30 of the game board D35 provided with the game area D30 through which the game ball can flow, and further, the game board D35 is provided with a center decoration D38. Drive (plant) a game nail. Further, a screw (screw, fastening means, etc.) for attaching (screwing, fastening, locking) the center decoration D38, which is a component provided (screwed) on the flow path of the game ball and is a game component, to the game board. Locking means, fixtures) are provided. The eaves portion (predetermined portion) D38-1 is provided on the upper surface of the front view region of the center decoration D38, and the eaves portion (predetermined portion) D38-1 is configured so as to descend from the rear side toward the front side.

With this configuration, even when the pachinko gaming machine is installed on the gaming island with the pachinko gaming machine tilted from the front side to the rear side, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from staying on the gaming parts. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), a game nail (for example, a game nail 1) is driven into the game board D35 in the vicinity of and on the left side of the eaves D38-1 of the center decoration D38 in the first region. It has been. As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the game nail is driven at 90 degrees with respect to the game board D35, and is an angle of α degree with respect to the game board D35 on the inclined surface which is the upper surface of the eaves D38-1. Is configured to be smaller than. In other words, the α degree, which is the angle of the inclined surface on the upper surface of the eaves D38-1, with respect to the game board D35, is configured to be larger than the angle of 90 degrees with respect to the game board D35 of the game nail. Since the pachinko gaming machine itself is installed on the game island so as to incline from the front side to the rear side (for example, a one-degree inclination from the front side to the rear side), the angle of the game nail is set to the game island. In the installed state, the angle of inclination from the front side to the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine itself is the same, but the pachinko gaming machine is set in advance so that it is horizontal when the pachinko gaming machine is installed on the gaming island. A game nail may be driven into the game board D35 at an angle opposite to the angle installed on the game island.

The protruding length of the eaves D38-1 and the game nail (the length protruding from the game board D35 toward the transparent plate D16) is the same in FIG. 40 (b). The game nail may be configured to have a longer protrusion length than the eaves D38-1, or the eaves D38-1 may be configured to have a longer protrusion length than the game nail. The distance between the game nail and the transparent plate D16 is configured to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance between the eaves D38-1 and the transparent plate D16 is configured to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball. You just have to do it. With this configuration, the game ball cannot pass between the game nail and the transparent plate D16 and between the eaves D38-1 and the transparent plate D16, while the game ball becomes a screw as described later. By making it passable between the transparent plate D16 and the transparent plate D16, it is possible to configure the game ball to flow down the intended flow path.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), a flow path (specific portion) D38-2 is provided in the left region (third region) of the front view of the center decoration D38, and further, the front surface of the center decoration D38. It is a part where the game ball flowing down from the flow path (specific part) D38-2 rolls left and right in the lower region of the visual view, and then it is dropped so as to enter the first main game start port A10. A rolling portion D38-3 is provided. Specifically, the flow path D38-2 is located on the left side of the rolling portion D38-3 and above the rolling portion D38-3, and is a warp provided in the left region of the center decoration D38. It is a flow path for the game ball that has entered from the entrance WP to flow down to the rolling portion D38-3. The lower surface of the flow path D38-2 is not inclined so as to descend from the rear side to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine like the eaves D38-1, and the pachinko gaming machine is self-supporting without being installed on the gaming island. In this state, it is horizontal (parallel to the upper and lower surfaces of the outer frame D12 of the pachinko gaming machine and is 90 degrees with respect to the gaming board D35. The inclination of the Z axis on the Z direction + side is 0 degrees, that is. , The Z-axis on the Z-direction + side is not displaced from the intersection of the Z-axis and the Y-axis toward the Y-axis in the Y-direction + or the Y-direction.) Since the pachinko gaming machine itself is installed on the game island so as to incline from the front side to the rear side (for example, a one-degree incline that descends from the front side to the rear side), the lower surface of the flow path D38-2 is In the state of being installed on the gaming island, the angle of inclination is the same as the angle of inclination from the front side to the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine itself, but the lower surface of the flow path D38-2 is installed on the gaming island by the pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko machine is configured to be tilted from the rear side to the front side, which is the angle of inclination opposite to the angle of inclination installed on the game island in advance so that the pachinko machine is horizontal in the laid-down state. You may. The lower surface of the flow path D38-2 is inclined so that the X-axis is lowered from the left side to the right side in the front view.

Further, a flow path D38-4 is provided in the right region of the front view of the center decoration D38. The flow path D38-4 is located on the right side of the rolling portion D38-3 and above the rolling portion D38-3, and enters from the warp entrance WP provided in the left region of the center decoration D38. It is a flow path in which the ball is flown down after flowing down to the rolling portion D38-3. The lower surface of the flow path D38-4 is not inclined so as to descend from the rear side to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine like the eaves D38-1, and the pachinko gaming machine is self-supporting without being installed on the gaming island. In this state, it is horizontal (parallel to the upper and lower surfaces of the outer frame D12 of the pachinko gaming machine and is 90 degrees with respect to the gaming board D35. The inclination of the Z axis on the Z direction + side is 0 degrees, that is. , The Z-axis on the Z-direction + side is not displaced from the intersection of the Z-axis and the Y-axis toward the Y-axis in the Y-direction + or the Y-direction.) Since the pachinko gaming machine itself is installed on the gaming island so as to incline from the front side to the rear side (for example, a one-degree inclination going down from the front side to the rear side), the lower surface of the flow path D38-4 is In the state of being installed on the gaming island, the angle of inclination is the same as the angle of inclination from the front side to the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine itself, but the lower surface of the flow path D38-4 is installed on the gaming island by the pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko machine is configured to be tilted from the rear side to the front side, which is the angle of inclination opposite to the angle of inclination installed on the game island in advance so that the pachinko machine is horizontal in the laid-down state. You may. The lower surface of the flow path D38-4 is inclined so that the X-axis is lowered from the right side to the left side in the front view.

Further, the lower surface of the flow path (specific portion) D38-2 is lowered from the rear side to the front side (for example, from the rear side to the front side) with the pachinko gaming machine installed on the game island. It may be configured to have an inclination angle of 1 degree). That is, a flow path (specific portion) D38-2 as a flow path of the game ball is provided at a position next to the rolling portion D38-3 and above the rolling portion D38-3, and this flow path D38- The angle of the inclined surface (lower surface) of 2 is smaller than the angle of the inclined surface of the eaves D38-1 (for example, 5 degrees) (the angle of the inclined surface of the eaves D38-1 is It is configured to be larger than the angle of the inclined surface of the flow path D38-2). With this configuration, the angle of the inclined surface of the flow path D38-2 located on the left side of the rolling portion D38-3 is smaller than that of the eaves portion D38-1, so that the game ball can be moved toward the front. It becomes difficult to fall, the chance that the game ball stays on the rolling portion can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that an inclined surface having a smaller angle of the inclined surface such as a game nail or a flow path D38-2 that descends from the rear side to the front side than the angle of the inclined surface of the eaves D38-1 is fired. Part or all of the inclined surface of the rail, the upper surface of the large winning opening (1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20) having a shutter (lid) that slides back and forth (game around the big winning opening) There is an inclined surface (where the ball can roll), an inclined surface at the lowermost portion of the game area D30 (for example, an inclined surface at the bottom of the out port D36), and the like.

Further, in the vicinity of the eaves D38-1, on the right side of the game nail 1, a screw BS1 for attaching the center decoration D38, which is a part screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30, is provided. .. Further, in the second region where the game ball flowing down the first region flows down, the game nail 2 and the game ball in the game area D30 flow in the vicinity of the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1). It is a part screwed on the road and is provided with a screw BS2 for attaching the center decoration D38. Further, in the second region, a ball return prevention member D39 and a screw BS3 for attaching a ball return prevention member D39, which is a component screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30, are provided. The eaves D38-1 is configured to be inclined to the left and right with the vicinity of the screw BS1 shown in FIG. 40 (a) as the apex. When the game ball is launched with the target of the first area of the game area D30, the game ball launched into the game area D30 flows down to the left-handed area or the right-handed area on the left side. When flowing down to the left-handed area, it is a part screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30, and is above the screws BS1 and the screw BS2 to which the center decoration D38 is attached (the Z direction + direction of the Z axis, that is, that is,). It flows down (referred to as "upward" when viewed from the player), or flows down on the screw BS3 to which the ball return prevention member D39 is attached, which is a component screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. On the other hand, when it flows down to the right-handed area, it flows down on the screw BS11 or the like to which the center decoration D38 is attached, which is a part screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30.

Next, the lengths of the game ball, the screw, and the game nail will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of the game board D35 of FIG. Here, the parts screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30, such as the screws BS1 to BS16 to which the game parts are attached, have a length in the longitudinal direction of the screws as shown in FIG. 41 (a). The total length) is configured to be A mm. The length (diameter) of the game ball is B mm (11 mm in detail), the length (total length) in the longitudinal direction of the game nail is D mm (27 mm in detail), and the front surface of the game board D35 to the rear surface of the transparent plate D16. The length (distance) up to is Emm (specifically 19 mm), and the length (thickness) of the game board D35 (specifically, the game board) is Fmm. When the length of the screw or the like is configured in this way, it is expressed as EA = C.

As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the length of the game nail that is not buried in the game board D35 and protrudes is D1, and the length of the game nail that is buried (planted) in the game board D35. Let it be D2. Specifically, D is 27 mm, D1 is 18 mm, and D2 is 9 mm, which is the length (total length) in the longitudinal direction of the game nail, which is a predetermined ratio of the length (total length) in the longitudinal direction of the game nail. The length of 1/3 (9 mm) is buried in the game board D35. Then, in a situation where the game nail is normally driven into the game board D35 and installed, 18 mm of D1 protrudes from the game board D35. That is, 18 mm or more, which is two-thirds of the total length of 27 mm of the game nail, protrudes from the game board D35. Further, in a situation where the game nail is normally driven into the game board D35 and installed, it protrudes from E (19 mm), which is the length (distance) from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, without being buried in the game board D35. G (1 mm), which is a value (length) obtained by subtracting D1 (18 mm), which is the length of the game nail, is configured to be shorter than B (11 mm), which is the diameter of the game ball.

The length D (which may be D1) in the longitudinal direction of the game nail is configured to be longer than the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw. In other words, the longitudinal length A of the screw is configured to be shorter than the longitudinal length D (which may be D1) of the game nail. Further, the number of screws installed in the game area D30 of the game board D35 is configured to be smaller than the number of game nails installed in the game area D30 of the game board D35. Further, in a state where the game nail is driven into the game board D35, the length of G shown in FIG. 41 (a), which is the distance between the tip of the game nail and the transparent plate D16, is the diameter of the game ball B. (The diameter B of the game ball is longer than the distance G between the game nail and the transparent plate D16). With this configuration, the game ball cannot pass between the game nail and the transparent plate D16, while the game ball can pass between the screw and the transparent plate D16, so that the intended game can be played. It is possible to design the flow path of the sphere.

As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the game ball is configured to be able to flow down the mounting position of the game component, which is the position on the game board surface where the screws BS1 to BS16 and the like are stopped. For example, when a game ball is launched with a target of the first area of the game area D30, the game ball launched into the game area D30 flows down to the left-handed area or the right-handed area on the left side. When it flows down to the left-handed area, it is a part screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30, and is on the screw BS1 and the screw BS2 for attaching the center decoration D38, and on the screw BS3 for attaching the ball return prevention member D39. Flow down. On the other hand, when it flows down to the right-handed area, it flows down on the screw BS11 or the like to which the center decoration D38 is attached, which is a part screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. Then, the flowing game ball collides with or comes into contact with the screw BS1, the screw BS2, the screw BS3, the screw BS11, etc., which are attached to the game board D35 with the game parts (center decoration D38, ball return prevention member D39, etc.). May loosen. In this way, when the screw is loosened and the screw is not disengaged from the game parts and the screw is loose, the game balls overlap at the loosened part of the screw and hinder the flow of the game ball, so-called grape. This causes a problem that the player cannot play the game. Then, if the player cannot play the game, there arises a problem that the player's interest in the game is impaired.

In order to solve such a problem, a first length, which is 1/3 of the length of the game nail in the longitudinal direction, is planted in the game board D35, and the screw is used. 1/3 x A as the second length, which is 1/3 of the predetermined ratio of A, which is the length in the longitudinal direction (the same ratio as the ratio at which the angstrom nail is planted). In the state of being screwed into the game board (screwed state), 2/3 × A as the third length of the screw protrudes and stands on the game board D35 (hereinafter referred to as the protruding state). In the protruding state of FIG. 41 (c), C3 = E as a value obtained by subtracting 2/3 × A, which is the third length, from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16. -2/3 x A is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball. The length (total length) in the longitudinal direction of the screw is set to A, but the total length of the screw is 15 pitches in terms of pitch, and 2/3 of A, which is the length in the longitudinal direction of the screw, is the game board. The state of (c) in FIG. 41 protruding from D35 becomes a protruding state of 10 pitches. When comparing a predetermined screw having a length of 1/3 screwed into the game board D35 and a game nail, the predetermined screw and the game nail provided in the nearest vicinity of the predetermined screw are compared. You may.

Further, half of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35 (screwed state), and half of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is half. In a protruding and self-supporting state with respect to the game board D35, the length from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, is 1/2 × A, which is half the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw. C2 = E-1 / 2 × A, which is the value obtained by subtracting the above, is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball. In addition, although the length (total length) in the longitudinal direction of the screw is set to A, the total length of the screw is 15 pitches in terms of pitch, and half of the part of A which is the length in the longitudinal direction of the screw is from the game board D35. The protruding state may be a protruding state of 8 pitches.

With this configuration, even if the screw that attaches the game component to the game board D35 is loosened to the limit where it can stand on its own, the distance from the tip of the protruding screw to the transparent plate D16 can be set as the game ball. By making the ball larger (longer) than the diameter of, the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game cannot be played, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be prevented. The screws are intended for the screws BS1 to BS16, but in particular, the screws BS1 provided in the vicinity of the eaves D38-1 and the screws provided in the vicinity of the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1). This is effective when the BS2, the screw BS3 provided for attaching the ball return prevention member D39, and the screw BS11 provided for attaching the center decoration D38 are loosened.

With respect to the screw BS1 provided in the vicinity of the eaves D38-1, the game ball flows down to the transparent plate D16 side due to the inclined surface of the eaves D38-1, so that the space between the screw BS1 and the transparent plate D16 is reached. Since the game ball can flow down reliably, the structure is such that the loose screw does not prevent the game ball from flowing down. Further, a left-handed game ball passes through the screw BS2 provided in the vicinity of the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) and the screw BS3 provided for attaching the ball return prevention member D39. Since it is an area, it has a structure that does not prevent the game ball from flowing down due to loose screws. Further, since the right-handed game ball always passes through the screw BS11 provided for attaching the center decoration D38, the structure is such that the loose screw does not hinder the flow of the game ball.

Here, there are a plurality of types of screws, and the lengths are configured to be different depending on the game parts to be mounted and the mounting position. Then, the game parts are configured to be mounted by using screws corresponding to the game parts to be used and the mounting position. For example, it is configured to use seven kinds of screws (bis 1 to 7) below, and the length A of the screws 1 to 7 is configured to have the following length. Further, the length of C, the length of A + B, the relationship between A and B, and the relationship between B and C are also shown below.
(Bis 1) A = 10.2 mm, C = 8.8 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≦ B, C ≦ B
(Bis 2) A = 10.1 mm, C = 8.9 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≦ B, C ≦ B
(Bis 3) A = 7.6 mm, C = 11.4 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≦ B, C ≧ B
(Bis 4) A = 12.4 mm, C = 6.6 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≧ B, C ≦ B
(Bis 5) A = 8.4 mm, C = 10.6 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≦ B, C ≦ B
(Bis 6) A = 9.4 mm, C = 9.6 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≦ B, C ≦ B
(Bis 7) A = 10.3 mm, C = 8.7 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≦ B, C ≦ B

The relationship between the length A of the screw and the diameter B of the game ball is basically A ≦ B, but having at least one screw (for example, screw 4) satisfying the relationship of A ≧ B. The game parts are attached using such screws. And, the number of bis satisfying the relationship of A ≦ B is used more than the number of bis satisfying the relationship of A ≧ B. Further, the relationship between the diameters B and C of the game ball is basically C ≦ B, but it has at least one screw (for example, screw 3) that satisfies the relationship of C ≧ B. Game parts are attached using such screws. And, the number of screws satisfying the relationship of C ≦ B is used more than the number of screws satisfying the relationship of C ≧ B. The number of screws (72) used in the game board D35 is smaller than the number of game nails (182) used in the game board D35, and the length A of the screws is the length of the game nails. It is shorter than D.

Next, half of A, which is the length of the above-mentioned seven types of screws in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35, and half of A, which is the length of the screws in the longitudinal direction, is half. In a protruding and self-supporting state with respect to the game board D35, the length from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, is 1/2 × A, which is half the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw. The length of C2, which is the value obtained by subtracting, the length of 1/2 × A + C2, the relationship between 1/2 × A and B, and the relationship between B and C2 are shown below.
(Bis 1) 1/2 x A = 5.1 mm, C2 = 13.9 mm, 1/2 x A + C2 = 19 mm, 1/2 x A≤B, C2≥B
(Bis 2) 1/2 x A = 5.1 mm, C2 = 13.9 mm, 1/2 x A + C2 = 19 mm, 1/2 x A≤B, C2≥B
(Bis 3) 1/2 × A = 3.8 mm, C2 = 15.2 mm, 1/2 × A + C2 = 19 mm, 1/2 × A ≦ B, C2 ≧ B
(Bis 4) 1/2 × A = 6.2 mm, C2 = 12.8 mm, 1/2 × A + C2 = 19 mm, 1/2 × A ≦ B, C2 ≧ B
(Bis 5) 1/2 × A = 4.2 mm, C2 = 14.8 mm, 1/2 × A + C2 = 19 mm, 1/2 × A ≦ B, C2 ≧ B
(Bis 6) 1/2 x A = 4.7 mm, C2 = 14.3 mm, 1/2 x A + C2 = 19 mm, 1/2 x A ≦ B, C2 ≧ B
(Bis 7) 1/2 × A = 5.2 mm, C2 = 13.8 mm, 1/2 × A + C2 = 19 mm, 1/2 × A ≦ B, C2 ≧ B

It is configured so that 1/2 × A ≦ B, that is, even if the screw is half loosened, the diameter of the game ball is longer than half the length of the screw, so that the game ball flows down. Since it is not stopped by the screw, the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 without becoming a so-called grape state, so that the player cannot play the game. It can be avoided. Further, by configuring so that C2 ≧ B, that is, even when the screw is half loosened, the distance from the screw to the glass plate is longer than the diameter of the game ball. Since the flow of the ball is not stopped by the screw, the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 without becoming a so-called grape state, so that the player cannot play the game. You can avoid the problem of getting rid of it.

Next, 1/3 of A, which is the length of the above-mentioned seven types of screws in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35, and 2 / of A, which is the length of the screws in the longitudinal direction. In a protruding state in which the portion 3 protrudes from the game board D35 and stands on its own, the length is 2/3 of the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16. The length of C3, which is the value obtained by subtracting a certain 2/3 × A, the length of 2/3 × A + C3, the relationship between 2/3 × A and B, and the relationship between B and C3 are shown below.
(Bis 1) 2/3 x A = 6.8 mm, C3 = 12.2 mm, 2/3 x A + C = 19 mm, 2/3 x A≤B, C3≥B
(Bis 2) 2/3 x A = 6.7 mm, C3 = 12.3 mm, 2/3 x A + C = 19 mm, 2/3 x A≤B, C3≥B
(Bis 3) 2/3 x A = 5.1 mm, C3 = 13.9 mm, 2/3 x A + C = 19 mm, 2/3 x A≤B, C3≥B
(Bis 4) 2/3 x A = 8.3 mm, C3 = 10.7 mm, 2/3 x A + C = 19 mm, 2/3 x A≤B, C3≤B
(Bis 5) 2/3 x A = 5.6 mm, C3 = 13.4 mm, 2/3 x A + C = 19 mm, 2/3 x A≤B, C3≥B
(Bis 6) 2/3 x A = 6.3 mm, C3 = 12.7 mm, 2/3 x A + C = 19 mm, 2/3 x A≤B, C3≥B
(Bis 7) 2/3 x A = 6.9 mm, C3 = 12.1 mm, 2/3 x A + C = 19 mm, 2/3 x A≤B, C3≥B

It is configured so that 2/3 × A ≦ B, that is, even if the screw is in a state where it can stand on its own, the diameter of the game ball is longer than 2/3 of the length of the screw, so that the game ball flows down. Is difficult to stop by the screw, and the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 without becoming a so-called grape state, so that the problem that the player cannot play the game is avoided. be able to. Further, for the screws other than the screw 4, the distance from the screw to the glass plate is the distance of the game ball even when the length of the screw is set to C3 ≧ B, that is, even if the length of 2/3 of the screw is loosened. By configuring the ball to be longer than the diameter, it becomes difficult for the game ball to be stopped by the screw, and the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 without becoming a so-called grape state. It is possible to avoid the problem that the player cannot play the game.

The right-handed area on the right side of the center of the game area D30 is configured to use a larger number of screws than the left-handed area on the left side of the center of the game area D30. This is because the number of game parts is larger in the right-handed area, and the momentum of the game ball launched in the right-handed area is very strong. Therefore, by configuring in this way, it becomes possible to more firmly attach the game component in the right-handed region to the game board D35. The right-handed area may be configured to use a smaller number of screws than the left-handed area. Further, the right-handed area is configured to use fewer game nails than the left-handed area, but the right-handed area uses more game nails than the left-handed area. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the right-handed area may use a larger number of screws than the left-handed area, while the right-handed area may use a smaller number of game nails than the left-handed area. Further, the right-handed area may use a larger number of screws than the left-handed area, and the right-handed area may use a larger number of game nails than the left-handed area. Further, the right-handed area may use a smaller number of screws than the left-handed area, while the right-handed area may use a larger number of game nails than the left-handed area. Further, the right-handed area may be used with a smaller number of screws than the left-handed area, and the right-handed area may be used with a smaller number of game nails than the left-handed area.

Further, the length of the screw in the right-handed region in the longitudinal direction is configured to be longer than the length of the screw in the left-handed region in the longitudinal direction (the length of the plurality of screws in the right-handed region in the longitudinal direction). The average may be configured to be longer than the average of the longitudinal lengths of the plurality of screws in the left-handed region, or the longitudinal length of a given screw in the right-handed region may be a specific screw in the left-handed region. May be configured to be longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of). This is because the momentum of the game ball fired in the right-handed area is very strong, and the screws are easily loosened by coming into contact with or in contact with the screws of the game parts. It becomes possible to more firmly attach the game parts in the area to the game board D35. Further, as described above, the right-handed area is configured to use a larger number of screws than the left-handed area, so that the game parts in the right-handed area can be more firmly attached to the game board D35. Is possible. The right-handed region may be configured to have a longer length in the longitudinal direction of the screw than the left-handed region.

In addition, there are left and right screws in the screws, but especially for the screws BS1 to BS3 and BS11, when the screws are turned clockwise, they are in the rearward direction in the Z direction (the Z direction of the Z axis). It is preferable to use a forward right screw. The right screw may be used for the screws provided at other positions. By using the right screw when attaching the game parts in the appropriate place to the game board in this way, when the game ball launched in the game area hits the screw, the force is easily applied in the clockwise direction, and the screw. Since the clock is closed, it is possible to prevent the screw from loosening during the game.

Next, the ball return prevention member D39 in the game board D35 of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 42. As shown in FIG. 42, the game board D35 is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Further, the game board D35 is formed with a guide rail D33 partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34. The guide rail D33 may be formed by the launch rail, a part of the outer rail D32, and a part of the inner rail D34. A ball return prevention member D39 provided with a prevention piece D39-1 for preventing the game ball flowing into the game area D30 from returning to the guide rail is provided near the exit of the guide rail D33. Specifically, a ball return prevention member D39 is provided at the tip of the inner rail D34.

The prevention piece D39-1 is swingably attached to the base D39-2, and as shown in FIG. 42 (a), prevents the game ball flowing into the game area D30 from returning to the guide rail. It is possible to swing between the second position (initial position) and the first position (guidance position) where the game ball launched in the game area D30 can be guided. The prevention piece D39-1 swings from the initial position to the right side and swings to the guide position, but is configured to be regulated without swinging from the initial position to the left side. That is, since it does not swing to the left from the initial position, it has a structure that can prevent the game ball guided to the game area from returning to the guide rail.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the state where the prevention piece D39-1 is in the initial position, the prevention piece D39-1 faces upward (substantially vertical direction), and the tip thereof faces the upper left. It is inclined (inclined from the upper left to the lower right), and the tip has an acute-angled shape. By forming the tip of the prevention piece D39-1 so as to incline toward the upper left, the game ball does not stay on the upper side of the prevention piece D39-1 as shown in FIG. 42 (b). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the base D39-2 has a rounded portion on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1 so that the game ball does not stay on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1. .. That is, in the state where the prevention piece D39-1 is in the initial position, the prevention piece D39-1 faces upward, and the game ball is on the upper side of the prevention piece D39-1 and on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1. Is configured so that it does not stay.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the distance from the tip of the prevention piece D39-1 to the outer rail D32 is L in the state where the prevention piece D39-1 is in the initial position. Then, the prevention piece D39-1 is attached to the base D39-2 so that L is smaller (L <B) than B, which is the diameter of the game ball. With this configuration, when the prevention piece D39-1 is in the initial position, the game ball cannot pass above the prevention piece D39-1, so that the game ball guided to the game area D30 moves to the guide rail D33. It is possible to prevent it from coming back. In FIG. 42 (b), a line extended from the left surface of the prevention piece D39-1 (one-dot chain line in the figure) is drawn, and the distance to the intersection with the outer rail D32 is L, but the prevention piece D39. It is preferable that L is the distance at which the distance from the tip of -1 to the outer rail D32 is the shortest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), when the prevention piece D39-1 is in the initial position, the tip of the prevention piece D39-1 is formed so as to protrude to the right side (game area side) (protruding portion). (Formation) may be performed. With this configuration, even if the game ball collides with the game nail located on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1 and bounces toward the prevention piece D39-1, the game ball moves to the guide rail due to the protrusion. It is possible to prevent it from coming back.

Here, in a state where the conventional ball return prevention member is provided in the game area, a situation may occur in which the launched game ball once flows into the game area and then flows back to the guide rail side, or the launched game ball may be released. When the ball flows into the game area, the game ball may stay at the tip of the ball return prevention member, which hinders the inflow of the game ball launched thereafter into the game area and the progress of the game. Therefore, it becomes one of the factors that impair the interest of the player's game.

In order to solve such a problem, a game board D35 provided with a game area D30 on which the game ball can flow down, a launching means (launching device D42) for launching the game ball toward the game area, and a launching means are used. A guide rail that guides the launched game ball to the game area D30, and a prevention piece D39-1 that is provided near the exit of the guide rail and prevents the game ball that has flowed into the game area D30 from returning to the guide rail. The preventive piece can be displaced to a first position where the launched game ball can be guided to the game area and a second position where the game ball that has flowed into the game area is prevented from returning to the guide rail. In the state where the piece is located at the second position, the preventive piece faces upward so that the game ball does not stay on the right side of the preventive piece.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the launched game ball from flowing back to the guide rail side after once flowing into the game area, and also to prevent the game ball from staying in the game area.

Further, screws BS1 to 3 are provided on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1. Then, assuming the case where the screws BS1 to 3 are loosened, the countermeasures are configured as follows. A state in which 1/3 × A as a second length, which is 1/3 of the predetermined ratio of A, which is the length of the screws BS1 to 3 in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board. When 2/3 × A as the third length of the screw is in a protruding state with respect to the game board D35, the third length from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16. It is configured so that C3 = E-2 / 3 × A as a value obtained by subtracting 2/3 × A is equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

Further, among the cases where the screws BS1 to 3 are loosened, the countermeasures assuming the case where half of the length of the screw is loosened are configured as follows. When half the length of A, which is the length in the longitudinal direction of the screw, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw is in a protruding state of 1/2 × A with respect to the game board D35, the game is played. C2 = E-1 / 2 × A as the value obtained by subtracting 1/2 × A, which is half the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw, from E, which is the length from the board D35 to the transparent plate D16. Is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even if the screw that attaches the game component to the game board D35 is loosened in a self-supporting state, the distance from the tip of the protruding screw to the transparent plate D16 is the diameter of the game ball. By making it larger (longer) than that, the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game is not in a state where the game cannot be played, and thus the player's interest is prevented from deteriorating. It becomes possible to do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, which is a side view of the first main game start port A10 attached to the game board D35, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s with respect to the entrance of the first main game start port A10. The mounting position of the above will be described.

FIG. 43A shows the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, which is a ball entry sensor, when the inside of the first main game start opening A10 is viewed from the entrance of the first main game start opening A10. Is a diagram showing that is in an invisible position. Although an example of the first main game start opening A10 is shown below, it can also be applied to other winning openings.

First, the first main game start port A10 has an entrance where a game ball flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a flow path downstream of the entrance where the game ball entering from the entrance flows down. A flow path 1 which is a guide flow path) and a flow path 2 which is a flow path which bends backward at a turning angle 1 downstream of the flow path 1 and is a flow path (guide flow path) through which the game ball flows backward. A flow path 3 that is a flow path that bends downward at a corner 2 downstream of the flow path 2 and is a flow path (guide flow path) through which the game ball flows downward, and is attached to the flow path 3. It is configured to include a first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s. Although the flow path 2 is horizontal in the figure, it is preferably a flow path that is inclined downward from the front direction to the rear direction.

The flow path 1 has a front side guide flow path component which is the front surface 1, a rear side guide flow path component which is the rear surface 1, a left side guide flow path component which is the left side surface, and a right side which is the right side surface. It is composed of a guide flow path constituent portion of the above and a lower guide flow path constituent portion which is a lower surface. The flow path 1 may be a flow path in which any surface (guide flow path component) does not exist, as long as the game ball can flow down, or is a circular or elliptical flow path instead of a rectangular flow path. It may be. In the case of a circular or elliptical flow path, it is composed of an arc-shaped guide flow path component, that is, a front side, a rear side, a left side, a right side, and a lower guide flow path component. Further, although the flow path 1 is composed of one member including the inlet, it may be composed of a plurality of members.

The flow path 2 has a front side guide flow path component which is the front surface 1, a rear side guide flow path component which is the rear surface 2, a left side guide flow path component which is the left side, and a right side guide which is the right side. It is composed of a flow path constituent part, an upper guide flow path constituent portion which is an upper surface, and a lower guide flow path constituent portion which is a lower surface. The flow path 2 may be a flow path in which any surface (guide flow path component) does not exist, as long as the game ball can flow down, or is a circular or elliptical flow path instead of a rectangular flow path. It may be. In the case of a circular or elliptical flow path, it is composed of an arc-shaped guide flow path component, that is, a front side, a rear side, a left side, a right side, an upper side, and a lower side guide flow path component. Further, although the flow path 2 is configured separately from the flow path 1, it may be configured integrally with the flow path 1. Further, although the flow path 2 is composed of one member, it may be composed of a plurality of members.

The flow path 3 has a front side guide flow path component which is the front surface 2, a rear side guide flow path component which is the rear surface 2, a left side guide flow path component which is the left side, and a right side guide which is the right side. It is composed of a flow path component and an upper guide flow path component which is an upper surface. The flow path 3 may be a flow path in which any surface (guide flow path component) does not exist, as long as the game ball can flow down, or is a circular or elliptical flow path instead of a rectangular flow path. It may be. In the case of a circular or elliptical flow path, it is composed of an arc-shaped guide flow path component, that is, a front side, a rear side, a left side, a right side, and an upper guide flow path component. Further, although the flow path 3 is configured separately from the flow path 2, it may be configured integrally with the flow path 2. Further, although the flow path 3 is composed of one member, it may be composed of a plurality of members. Further, the flow paths 1 to 3 may be integrally configured, or the flow paths 1 to 3 may be configured by a plurality of members.

Here, an arbitrary location at the entrance of the first main game start port A10 and an arbitrary location of the first main game start port entry detection device A11s are connected by a straight line (two-dot chain lines 1 to 3 in the figure). It should be noted that, with respect to any part of the entrance of the first main game start opening A10, the position in the frontmost direction of the entrance is illustrated in FIG. 43 (a), but the position is not limited to this position and constitutes the entrance. It may be at any position of the surface (in other words, the surface formed by the space through which the game ball can pass). Further, with respect to any part of the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, in FIG. 43 (a), the position in the frontmost direction (two-dot chain line) on the upper surface of the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s. 1), the position in the rearmost direction (two-dot chain line 2), and the space between the frontmost direction and the most rearward direction (two-dot chain line 3) are exemplified, but the position is not limited to these positions, and the first position is not limited to these positions. 1 It may be at any position on the surface of the main game start port entry ball detection device A11s in the inlet direction.

Then, even if the player looks inside from the entrance of the first main game start port A10 along the two-dot chain line 1 of FIG. 43 (a), the first main game starts from the entrance of the first main game start port A10. The first main game start mouth-entry ball detection device A11s is invisible due to the lower guide flow path component (lower surface) provided up to the mouth-entry ball detection device A11s. Further, even if the player looks inside from the entrance of the first main game start port A10 along the two-dot chain line 2, from the entrance of the first main game start port A10 to the ball detection device A11s of the first main game start port. The first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is invisible due to the guide flow path component (rear surface 1) provided on the rear side. Further, even if the player looks inside from the entrance of the first main game start port A10 along the two-dot chain line 3, from the entrance of the first main game start port A10 to the ball detection device A11s of the first main game start port. The first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is invisible due to the lower guide flow path component (lower surface) provided in. In this way, the straight line connecting an arbitrary portion of the entrance of the first main game start port A10 and an arbitrary portion of the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is in the case of drawing a straight line. Also, since it collides with any of the guide flow path components of the flow path 1, the flow path 2, and the flow path 3, the first main game start port A10 is connected to the first main game start port A10 from the entrance of the first main game start port A10. When looking inside, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s, which is an entry sensor, is configured to be invisible to the player.

Here, although it is not a straight line connecting an arbitrary portion of the entrance of the first main game start port A10 and an arbitrary portion of the first main game start port entry detection device A11s, the first main game start port A10 A straight line (two-dot chain line 4 in FIG. 43) connects the most rearward portion of the entrance (position of the rear surface 1) and the intersection of the rear surface 1 constituting the flow path 1 and the upper surface constituting the flow path 2. Even if the player looks inside from the entrance of the first main game start port A10 along the two-dot chain line 4, from the entrance of the first main game start port A10 to the ball detection device A11s of the first main game start port. The first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is invisible due to the provided lower guide flow path component (lower surface).

The two-dot chain line 4 shows a line when looking downward from the rearmost position of the entrance of the first main game start port A10, but the position of the entrance is not limited to this position and is the entrance. It may be any position of the surface (in other words, the surface composed of the space through which the game ball can pass), and the two-dot chain line 4 is a line when looking downward from the position of the entrance. All you need is.

Here, in a state where the first main game start port A10 is attached to the game board D35, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s for detecting the game ball that has passed through the first main game start port A10 is used for the game. When it is attached to a position that can be seen by a person, a game ball with a fishing line attached is fired, and a prize ball is obtained by illegally entering the first main game start port A10, or a special game is aimed at. The cheating is done and it becomes a problem in the playground.

In order to solve such a problem, the game board D35 provided with the game area D30 on which the game ball can flow down, the transparent plate D16 provided on the front surface of the game board D35, and the game board D35 were planted. A plurality of game nails, a first main game start port A10 provided at a predetermined position on the game board D35 and into which a game ball can enter, and a first main game start port A10 provided on the flow path of the game ball to play a game. A predetermined screw to be screwed on the board, a guide flow path (flow paths 1 to 3) through which the game ball entering the first main game start port A10 can flow down, and a guide flow path (for example, flow path 3). It is provided with a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s provided at a predetermined position and capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10, and a first main game start port is provided in the guide flow path. A guide flow path component that guides the game ball that has entered the A10 in a direction different from the entry direction is provided, and a predetermined location at the entrance of the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port entry detection device. The guide flow path constituent portion constituting the guide flow path is configured to intervene on the straight line connecting the predetermined points of A11s.

Further, in the flow path from the entrance of the first main game start port A10 to the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, at least one other than the corner 2 immediately before the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is set. It is configured to have a corner (turn angle 1 in FIG. 43). Further, although a flow path having two corners (flow paths 1, 2, 3) is exemplified, a flow path having three or more turns may be used.

With this configuration, a game ball with a fishing line attached is fired to prevent fraudulent acts such as obtaining a prize ball or aiming for a special game by illegally entering the first main game start port A10. be able to.

Further, in the two-dot chain lines 1, 3 and 4, the lower surface (the lower guide flow path component constituting the flow path 2) makes the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s invisible from the entrance. In the two-dot chain line 2, the rear surface 1 (the rear guide flow path component constituting the flow path 1) makes the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s invisible from the entrance. Although shown, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is inserted from the entrance by the surface (guide flow path component) corresponding to the shape of the flow path, not limited to these surfaces (guide flow path component). It suffices if it is invisible. Further, an example is shown in which the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is invisible from the entrance due to one surface (guide flow path component), but two or more surfaces (guide flow path component) are shown. ) May be configured so that the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s cannot be visually recognized from the entrance.

Next, in FIG. 43B, a game ball enters from the entrance of the first main game start port A10, and the entered game ball flows down via the flow path 1, the flow path 2, and the flow path 3. It is a figure which shows until just before the game ball is detected by the 1st main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s. Although an example of the first main game start opening A10 is shown below, it can also be applied to other winning openings.

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the game ball that has entered from the entrance of the first main game start port A10 flows down the flow path 1 in the downward direction. After that, when the game ball flows down to the corner 1, it flows backward by the corner 1 and flows down the flow path 2 as it is. After that, when the game ball flows down to the turning angle 2, it flows down by the turning angle 2 and flows down the flow path 3 as it is. The flow path 3 is provided with a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, which is an entry sensor having a ball inlet capable of passing the game ball, and is a game in which the flow path 3 flows downward. The ball is configured to be detected by the first main game start port entry detection device A11s.

Here, in the case of a flow path in which the flow speed of the two flowing game balls becomes very high, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10 continuously performs the flow path. There is a case where two game balls that have flowed down are erroneously detected as one game ball.

In order to solve such an erroneous detection of a game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the first main game is played from the entrance of the first main game start port A10. Bend angle 2 immediately before the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s in the guide flow path (flow paths 1 to 3) to the start port entry ball detection device A11s (for example, a position where the flow path 2 turns to the flow path 3). K, which is the distance from the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, is configured to be less than B, which is the diameter of the game ball. In other words, K, which is the shortest length from the apex of the corner 2 which is the corner closest to the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s to the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s, is the game ball. The first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is provided in the flow path 3 so as to be shorter than the diameter B. That is, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is arranged in the flow path 3 so that K <B.

The angle of the bending angle 2 (the angle formed by the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path 2 and the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path 3) is shown as an example of a right angle, but an acute angle or an obtuse angle may be used. The shortest length from the main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s to the apex of the nearest acute-angled or obtuse-angled turning angle 2 may be shorter than the diameter B of the game ball. Further, it may be bent in an arc shape, and in this case, the shortest length from the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s to the midpoint of the nearest arcuate turn angle 2 is the diameter of the game ball. It suffices if it is configured shorter than a certain B. The flow path 3 may be a flow path that guides the game ball in the flow path 2 in front of the flow path 3 in a direction different from the flow direction (or a different angle).

Further, although the angle of the bending angle 1 (the angle formed by the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path 1 and the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path 2) is shown as an example of a right angle, an acute angle or an obtuse angle may be used, and an arc shape may be used. It may be bent to. The flow path 2 is in a direction different from the flow direction of the game ball of the flow path 1 which is the flow path in front of the flow path 2 (the entry direction of the game ball entering the first main game start port A10). Alternatively, it may be a flow path that guides the flow path to a different angle).

Further, J, which is the distance from the upper surface of the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s facing the surface constituting the entrance where the game ball enters, to the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, is played. It is configured to be less than 2 × B, which is the diameter of two spheres. In other words, it is a surface (guide flow path component) constituting the corner 2 which is the corner closest to the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, and is the game of the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. J, which is the shortest length from the upper surface, which is the surface facing the surface forming the entrance for the ball to enter, to the first main game start port entry detection device A11s, is the diameter of two game balls. The first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is provided in the flow path 3 so as to be less than × B. That is, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is arranged in the flow path 3 so as to have a relationship of J <2 × B.

With this configuration, by hitting the rear surface 2 (flow path component) of the flow path 3, the game is played by the first main game start port entry detection device A11s in a state immediately after the momentum of the game ball is lost. The ball can be detected, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that two game balls are one. If J and K are made too long, the game balls will accelerate and the speed will increase when they reach the first main game start port entry detection device A11s, and the speed of two game balls will be one. It should be added that the possibility of false detection as an individual increases.

In the guide flow paths (flow paths 1 to 3) of FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the flow path 1 is a flow path through which the game ball flows downward, and the flow path 2 is the flow path in which the game ball flows backward. An example is shown in which the flow path is a flow path in which the game ball flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path in which the game ball flows downward. The flow path may be a flow path in which the game ball flows down, leftward, or rightward, and the flow path 3 may be a flow path in which the game ball flows in the left direction. , It may be a flow path that flows down in any of the right direction and the rear direction.

For example, in the case where the flow path 1 flows downward, the flow path 2 and the flow path 3 are configured as follows.
(1) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows backward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the left.
(2) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows backward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the right.
(3) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the left, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down.
(4) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the left, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the rear direction.
(5) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the left, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the right.
(6) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the right, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down.
(7) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the right, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the rear direction.
(8) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the right, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the left.

For example, in the case where the flow path 1 flows backward, the flow path 2 and the flow path 3 are configured as follows.
(1) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows backward.
(2) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the left.
(3) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the right.
(4) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the left, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down.
(5) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the left, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the rear direction.
(6) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the left, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the right.
(7) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the right, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down.
(8) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the right, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the rear direction.
(9) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the right, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the left.

For example, when the flow path 1 flows down to the left, the flow path 2 and the flow path 3 are configured as follows.
(1) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows backward.
(2) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the left.
(3) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the right.
(4) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows backward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows downward.
(5) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows backward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the left.
(6) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows backward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the right.
(7) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the right, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down.
(8) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the right, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the rear direction.
(9) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the right, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the left.

For example, when the flow path 1 flows down to the right, the flow path 2 and the flow path 3 are configured as follows.
(1) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows backward.
(2) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the left.
(3) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows downward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the right.
(4) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows backward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows downward.
(5) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows backward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the left.
(6) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows backward, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the right.
(7) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the left, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down.
(8) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the left, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the rear direction.
(9) The flow path 2 is a flow path that flows down to the left, and the flow path 3 is a flow path that flows down to the right.

Even when such a flow path 1, a flow path 2, and a flow path 3 are configured, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the first main game start port is connected to the first main game start port A10. First main game start port in the guide flow path (flow paths 1 to 3) to the ball entry detection device A11s From the corner 2 immediately before the ball entry detection device A11s (for example, the position where the flow path 2 turns to the flow path 3). 1 K, which is the distance to the main game start port entry detection device A11s, is configured to be less than B, which is the diameter of the game ball. In other words, K, which is the shortest length from the apex of the corner 2 which is the corner closest to the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s to the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s, is the game ball. The first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is provided in the flow path 3 so as to be shorter than the diameter B. That is, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is arranged in the flow path 3 so that K <B.

Further, even when such a flow path 1, a flow path 2, and a flow path 3 are configured, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s faces the surface constituting the entrance into which the game ball enters. J, which is the distance from the upper surface to the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, is configured to be less than 2 × B, which is the diameter of two game balls. In other words, it is a surface (guide flow path component) constituting the corner 2 which is the corner closest to the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, and is the game of the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. J, which is the shortest length from the upper surface, which is the surface facing the surface forming the entrance for the ball to enter, to the first main game start port entry detection device A11s, is the diameter of two game balls. The first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is provided in the flow path 3 so as to be less than × B. That is, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is arranged in the flow path 3 so as to have a relationship of J <2 × B.

Regarding the guide flow paths (flow paths 1 to 3) that flow down in the left, right, and rear directions, it is preferable to provide a downward inclination so that the game ball flows down downstream of the flow path. Further, the guide flow path (flow paths 1 to 3) may be a flow path that guides the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 in a direction (or a different angle) different from the entry direction. , Even if the flow path is in the same direction (or the same angle) (for example, the flow path 3), the flow path in front (for example, the flow path 2) guides in a different direction (or a different angle). It's fine. Further, although a flow path having two corners (flow paths 1, 2, 3) is exemplified, a flow path having three or more turns may be used. Further, although the flow path 3 is configured to be provided with the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, it may be configured to be provided in another flow path. Further, although an example in which the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is provided horizontally is shown, it may be configured to be provided vertically or at an angle.

Further, screws BS9 and 14 (see FIG. 40) are provided for attaching the first main game start port A10 to the game board D35. Then, assuming the case where the screws BS9 and 14 are loosened, the countermeasures are configured as follows. A state in which 1/3 × A as a second length, which is 1/3 of the predetermined ratio of A, which is the length of the screws BS9 and 14 in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board. When 2/3 × A as the third length of the screw is in a protruding state with respect to the game board D35, the third length from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16. It is configured so that C3 = E-2 / 3 × A as a value obtained by subtracting 2/3 × A is equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

Further, among the cases where the screws BS9 and 14 are loosened, the countermeasures assuming the case where half of the length of the screw is loosened are configured as follows. When half the length of A, which is the length in the longitudinal direction of the screw, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw is in a protruding state of 1/2 × A with respect to the game board D35, the game is played. C2 = E-1 / 2 × A as the value obtained by subtracting 1/2 × A, which is half the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw, from E, which is the length from the board D35 to the transparent plate D16. Is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even if the screw that attaches the first main game start port A10 to the game board D35 is loosened in a self-supporting state, the distance from the tip of the protruding screw to the transparent plate D16. By making the ball larger (longer) than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game cannot be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the game when the power supply is cut off after the game ball is launched and then the power supply is restarted will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a case where the power supply is cut off after the game ball is launched and then the power supply is restarted. Generally, in a normal game, a game ball is launched by a launcher D42, and the launched game ball moves along a guide rail D33 partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34. However, it is configured to reach the second region (which may be the first region) of the game region D30. Then, the game ball that has reached the second region collides with a plurality of game nails, obstacles D48 that cause the game ball to flow down in a predetermined direction, a windmill D49, and the like, and is shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. ], And is configured to enter the first main game start port A10.

Here, by intentionally shutting off the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine after launching the game ball and then restarting the power supply, a fraudulent act such as acquiring a random number corresponding to the special game and aiming at the special game. Is a problem. In addition, for some reason, an abnormal situation such as a momentary power failure (cutoff of power supply) and restoration (resumption of power supply) may occur.

In order to solve such a problem, first, a case where the power supply is restarted at the timing when the game ball is present at the position shown as “Power failure recovery 1” in FIG. 44 will be described. First, the game ball is launched by the launcher D42. Timing when the launched game ball is at a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 (the position indicated as "power interruption" in FIG. 44) partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34. The power supply is cut off at, and the power is turned from on to off. Immediately after that, it is a position until the launched game ball reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and is a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 (indicated as "power recovery 1" in FIG. 44). The power supply is restarted at the timing at the position where it was set), and the power is turned on from off. After that, the game ball that has passed through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) reaches the second area of the game area D30. Here, the second region is a region where the game ball launched with the weakest firing strength that can reach the game region D30 reaches, as the firing strength of the launching device D42.

The game ball that has reached the second region flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 44 while colliding with the obstacle D48 and the windmill D49 that cause the game balls to flow down in a predetermined direction. Then, the ball enters the first main game start port A10. However, since the main program of the main control board M is not activated at the timing when the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s, the first one. Even if the game ball that has entered the main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening entry detection device A11s, the entry is not detected.

That is, the time until the power supply is restarted, the main program of the main control board M is started, and the game ball can be detected by the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s (ta described with reference to FIG. 46). Is a position until the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and is a game area starting from a predetermined position of the guide rail D33. It is longer than the time (t5) until the game ball flows down the "flow route of the game ball" of D30, enters the first main game start port A10, and passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s. It is configured to be long. That is, it is configured so that ta> t5.

Here, the position until the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and the game starts from a predetermined position of the guide rail D33. T5, which is the time until the game ball flows down the "flow route of the game ball" in the area D30, enters the first main game start port A10, and passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s. , The time will vary due to the influence of the game nails, obstacles D48, and windmill D49, but even if the maximum time when the "game ball flow route" is flowed down is t5, ta> t5. It is configured to be. It should be noted that when the game ball passes through the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s after entering the warp entrance WP provided in the left region of the center decoration D38, or when a state called grape occurs. 1 When the game ball passes through the main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, ta> t5 may not be satisfied. That is, in a situation where the game is proceeding normally, when the game ball flows down in the left-handed area, ta> t5 is configured regardless of the flow-down route of the game ball.

Next, a case where the power supply is restarted at the timing when the game ball exists at the position indicated by “Return to power failure 2” in FIG. 44 will be described. First, the game ball is launched by the launcher D42. Timing when the launched game ball is at a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 (the position indicated as "power interruption" in FIG. 44) partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34. The power supply is cut off at, and the power is turned from on to off. Immediately after that, the power is supplied at a predetermined position immediately after the launched game ball passes through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) (the position indicated as “power recovery 2” in FIG. 44). Supply is resumed and the power is turned on from off. After that, the game ball that has passed through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) reaches the second area of the game area D30. Here, the second region is a region where the game ball launched with the weakest firing strength that can reach the game region D30 reaches, as the firing strength of the launching device D42.

The game ball that has reached the second region flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 44 while colliding with the obstacle D48 and the windmill D49 that cause the game balls to flow down in a predetermined direction. Then, the ball enters the first main game start port A10. However, since the main program of the main control board M is not activated at the timing when the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s, the first one. Even if the game ball that has entered the main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening entry detection device A11s, the entry is not detected.

That is, the time until the power supply is restarted, the main program of the main control board M is started, and the game ball can be detected by the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s (ta described with reference to FIG. 46). Is a "flow route of the game ball" in the game area D30 starting from a predetermined position at the timing when the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off passes through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1). Is configured to flow down and enter the first main game start port A10, and to take a longer time than the time (t4) until the game ball passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s. There is. That is, it is configured so that ta> t4.

Here, the “flow route of the game ball” in the game area D30 starts from a predetermined position at the timing when the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off passes through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1). The time until the game ball passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s after entering the first main game start port A10 is t4, which is a game nail, an obstacle D48, or a windmill. Although the time varies due to the influence of D49, ta> t4 is configured even when the maximum time when the “game ball flow route” is flowed down is t4. It should be noted that when the game ball passes through the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s after entering the warp entrance WP provided in the left region of the center decoration D38, or when a state called grape occurs. 1 When the game ball passes through the main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, ta> t4 may not be obtained. That is, in a situation where the game is proceeding normally, when the game ball flows down in the left-handed area, ta> t4 is configured regardless of the flow-down route of the game ball.

Here, since the relationship is t5> t4, it can also be configured as follows in the case of “power recovery 1”. First, the game ball is launched by the launcher D42. Timing when the launched game ball is at a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 (the position indicated as "power interruption" in FIG. 44) partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34. The power supply is cut off at, and the power is turned from on to off. Immediately after that, it is a position until the launched game ball reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and is a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 (indicated as "electric failure return 1" in FIG. 44. The power supply is restarted at the timing when the game ball is present at the position, and the power is turned on from off. After that, the game ball that has passed through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) is the second of the game area D30. Reaching the region. Here, the second region is a region where the game ball launched with the weakest firing intensity that can reach the game region D30 reaches, as the firing strength of the launching device D42.

The game ball that has reached the second region flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 44 while colliding with the obstacle D48 and the windmill D49 that cause the game balls to flow down in a predetermined direction. Then, the ball enters the first main game start port A10. However, since the main program of the main control board M is not activated at the timing when the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s, the first one. Even if the game ball that has entered the main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening entry detection device A11s, the entry is not detected.

That is, the time until the power supply is restarted, the main program of the main control board M is started, and the game ball can be detected by the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s (ta described with reference to FIG. 46). Is the first main game by flowing down the "flowing route of the game ball" in the game area D30 starting from a predetermined position at the timing when the launched game ball passes through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1). It is configured to be longer than the time (t4) until the game ball enters the start port A10 and passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s. That is, in the case of "power recovery 1", ta> t4 is configured.

With such a configuration, fraudulent activity can be prevented. Further, in the case of an abnormal situation, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first main game starting port A10, and it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage of the game field.

It should be noted that the main program of the main control board M is activated and the game ball can be detected by the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, for example, the timer interrupt process after the execution of step 1016 in FIG. It may be the time of execution of.

It should be noted that this is the position until the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and the game starts from a predetermined position of the guide rail D33. The time until the game ball passes through the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s after flowing down the "game ball flow route" in the area D30 and entering the first main game start port A10 is set to t5. However, the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off flows down the "game ball flow route" of the game area D30 from a predetermined position of the launch rail downstream of the guide rail D33, and is the first main. The time from entering the game start port A10 until the game ball passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s may be set to t6. Even in this case, it is configured so that ta> t6.

Although the example of the first main game start opening A10 is shown, it can also be applied to other winning openings. In addition, it may be fired so as to reach the first area instead of the second area. In this case, the game ball that has reached the first area flows down the second area, and the "flow route of the game ball". It suffices if it is configured to flow down. Further, although the number of game nails used in the game board D35 is 182, 117 game nails are provided in the left-handed area and 65 game nails are provided in the right-handed area. ing. It should be added that the number of game nails is just an example.

Further, screws BS1 to 3 are provided on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1. Then, assuming the case where the screws BS1 to 3 are loosened, the countermeasures are configured as follows. A state in which 1/3 × A as a second length, which is 1/3 of the predetermined ratio of A, which is the length of the screws BS1 to 3 in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board. When 2/3 × A as the third length of the screw is in a protruding state with respect to the game board D35, the third length from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16. It is configured so that C3 = E-2 / 3 × A as a value obtained by subtracting 2/3 × A is equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

Further, among the cases where the screws BS1 to 3 are loosened, the countermeasures assuming the case where half of the length of the screw is loosened are configured as follows. When half the length of A, which is the length in the longitudinal direction of the screw, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw is in a protruding state of 1/2 × A with respect to the game board D35, the game is played. C2 = E-1 / 2 × A as the value obtained by subtracting 1/2 × A, which is half the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw, from E, which is the length from the board D35 to the transparent plate D16. Is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even if the screw that attaches the game component to the game board D35 is loosened in a self-supporting state, the distance from the tip of the protruding screw to the transparent plate D16 is the diameter of the game ball. By making it larger (longer) than that, the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game is not in a state where the game cannot be played, and thus the player's interest is prevented from deteriorating. It becomes possible to do.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the power supply is cut off after the game ball in the pachinko gaming machine equipped with the ball entry sensor and the discharge sensor is launched, and then the game ball is turned on when the power supply is restarted. The game when it is located between the ball sensor and the discharge sensor will be described.

In recent years, the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s as a ball entry sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the first main game start opening A10, and the downstream of the first main game start opening entry ball detection device A11s. Pachinko gaming machines that are provided with discharge sensors A12s located on the side and are configured to match the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10 with the number of game balls that have been discharged have become widespread. There is. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the power supply is cut off and then the power supply is restarted, the ball entry sensor does not detect the passage of the game ball and only the discharge sensor A12s detects the passage of the game ball. Then, a mismatch error occurs in which the number of game balls entered and the number of game balls ejected do not match, and there is a problem that the game cannot be played.

In order to solve such a problem, it is configured as follows. First, the game ball is launched by the launcher D42. A predetermined position of the guide rail D33 in which the launched game ball is partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34 (for example, the position shown as "electricity failure" in FIG. 44). The power supply is cut off at a predetermined position in the game area D30, the position (a) in FIG. 45, and the like, and the power is turned from on to off. After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the power supply is restarted at the timing when the game ball exists at a predetermined position between the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s and the discharge sensor A12s. Turns from off to on. After that, the game ball passes through the discharge sensor A12s. However, since the main program of the main control board M is not activated at the timing when the game ball passes through the discharge sensor A12s, even if the game ball passes through the discharge sensor A12s, the entry is not detected. ing. That is, the power supply is cut off during the time until the power supply is restarted, the main program of the main control board M is activated, and the game ball can be detected by the discharge sensor A12s (ta described with reference to FIG. 46). The game ball completely passes through the predetermined position of the flow path 3 at the timing when the previously launched game ball passes through the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s (the game ball completely passes through the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s). It is configured to take a longer time than the time (t3) until the game ball passes through the discharge sensor A12s starting from the position (position immediately after). That is, it is configured so that ta> t3. The timing at which the power supply is restarted and the timing at which the game ball passes through the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s may be the same timing or different timings.

The main program of the main control board M is activated and the game ball can be detected by the discharge sensor A12s, for example, when the timer interrupt process after the execution of step 1016 in FIG. 5 is executed.

It should be noted that a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 in which the launched game ball is partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34 (for example, the position indicated as "electricity failure" in FIG. 44). ), A predetermined position of the game area D30, an example in which the power supply is cut off at a timing at the position (a) in FIG. 45, etc. It may be a case where the power supply is cut off before it is detected by the game start port entry detection device A11s. Further, although the discharge sensor A12s has been described as being a discharge sensor corresponding only to the first main game start port entry detection device A11s, it may function as a discharge sensor A12s corresponding to a plurality of winning ports.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the discharge sensor A12s in the event of an abnormal situation. Therefore, the number of game balls entered into the winning opening and the discharged game ball It is possible to prevent inconsistency with the number of.

FIG. 46 shows the timing at which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is started and the timing at which the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off is detected by the ball entry sensor after the power supply is started. It is a timing chart shown.

First, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is cut off (power supply is stopped), it means that the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine is turned off, the power cable is disconnected, or the power supply is turned off. It means that the cable is broken or that the game hall itself is out of power. It also includes cases where the power supply is unintentionally cut off at the amusement park.

Power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply voltage level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply voltage level from time t2. It should be noted that the figure illustrates a case where the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply voltage level is constant, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply voltage level may vary (randomly). Note that ΔT1 is the time from the start of power supply to the time when the level of power supply to the main control board M reaches the supply voltage level.

The main program executed on the main control board M is started from the time ta when the power supply voltage becomes constant from the time t2 to ΔT2. By executing this main program, the START (power-on) process of the main process on the main control board side shown in FIG. 5 is executed. In the process of step 1016 of FIG. 5, the timer interrupt is permitted and the timer interrupt is activated. After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is called and executed every predetermined cycle T. The period T at which the timer interrupt is executed is 4.0 msec. Note that ΔT2 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply voltage level until the main program of the main control board M is started. Here, the relationship ΔT2> ΔT1 is established.

Further, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is discharged from a predetermined position of the flow path 3 at the timing when the game ball passes (starting from the time t1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is started). The time when the game ball passes through the sensor A12s is t3.

Further, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine was started from a predetermined position at the timing when the game ball launched before the power supply was cut off passed the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1). Starting from time t1), the ball flows down the "flow route of the game ball" in the game area D30 and enters the first main game start port A10, and the game ball passes through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s. The time to do is t4.

Further, it is a position until the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and is a position starting from a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 (pachinko game). Starting from the time t1 when the power supply to the machine is started), the ball flows down the "game ball flow route" of the game area D30 and enters the first main game start port A10, and enters the first main game start port. The time when the game ball passes through the ball detection device A11s is t5.

In addition, the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off starts from a predetermined position on the launch rail downstream of the guide rail D33 (starting from time t1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is started). The time at which the game ball passes through the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s after flowing down the "game ball flow route" in the area D30 and entering the first main game start port A10 is t6.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the overlapping relationship between the game ball flowing down on the mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 and the mounting portion D38-6 will be described. FIG. 47 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which a game ball flowing down on a mounting portion D38-6 (front side in FIG. 47) located in the first region of the game area D30 is in contact with the game nail 1.

As shown in FIG. 44, the center decoration D38 attaches the center decoration D38 to the game board D35 by screwing screws, which are mounting tools, into the mounting holes of a plurality of mounting portions D38-6 provided in the center decoration D38. It is configured in. The mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 is configured to have an area larger than the area of the gaming ball when the game ball is viewed in a plan view, and the gaming ball is configured to be able to flow down on the mounting portion D38-6. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the outer edge of the mounting portion D38-6 has a taper which is an inclined surface (inclined surface descending to the game area side) in which the thickness of the mounting portion D38-6 gradually decreases toward the outside. The portion D38-5 is formed. The width of the tapered portion D38-5 is shorter than half the diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball is configured to be able to flow down on the tapered portion D38-5 so as to protrude from the tapered portion D38-5. Then, the game ball flowing down on the tapered portion D38-5 not only flows downward, but also moves in the front-rear direction (see the front and rear directions shown in FIG. 41) by coming into contact with the tapered portion D38-5. However, it is designed to flow downward. Further, the center decoration D38 is provided with a wall portion D38-7 that partitions the game area D30, and in FIG. 47 (a), the mounting portion D38-6 side (left side in the figure) with the wall portion D38-7 as a reference. ) Is a game area D30 in which the game ball can flow down, and the effect display device SG side (right side in the figure) is a non-game area in which the game ball cannot flow down.

FIG. 47 (a) is on a straight line 1 of a one-dot chain line connecting the center of the game nail 1, which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the first region of the game area D30, and the center of the screw BS1. It shows a state in which the center of the game ball is located and the game ball is in contact with the game nail 1. In order to express the state in which the game nail and the game ball are in contact with each other in an easy-to-understand manner, the game nail shows a cross section of the body portion of the game nail (see FIG. 41 for the body portion). The area of the game nail 1, which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the first area of the game area D30, has a normal firing strength that can reach the game area D30 as the firing strength of the launching device D42. It is the area reached by the game ball launched in, and is also called the first bumping area where the game ball can pass between the game nail 1 and the game nail located next to the game nail 1. be.

In this state, the mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 is placed on the wall so that Ba, which is 50% or more of the diameter of the game ball B, overlaps the mounting portion D38-6. Starting from the portion D38-7, it extends to the game nail 1 side on the game area D30 side, and Ba, which is 50% or more of the diameter of the game ball B, is relative to the mounting portion D38-6. The game nail 1 is provided from the outer edge of the tapered portion D38-5 at the position of Bb, which is less than 50% of the diameter of the game ball, so that the game nails 1 are overlapped with each other.

With this configuration, not only the game ball can flow downward by the tapered portion D38-5 of the mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 and the game nail 1, but also in the front-rear direction (direction shown in FIG. 41). By allowing the game to flow downward while moving to (see), the movement of the game ball can be made irregular, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Although an example of making the movement of the game ball irregular by the mounting portion D38-6 and the game nail 1 in the first region is shown, the mounting portion D38-6 located in the second region shown in FIGS. 40 and 44 has been shown. , The taper portion D38-5, the wall portion D38-7, the game nail 2 which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the second region, and the screw BS2 are similarly configured. Further, among the mounting portion D38-6 located in the third region, the tapered portion D38-5, the wall portion D38-7, the mounting portion D38-6 located in the third region, and the continuous nail 1 shown in FIGS. 40 and 44. The screw BS5, which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the third region, is similarly configured. The area of the game nail 2, which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the second area of the game area D30, is the weakest firing strength that can reach the game area D30 as the firing strength of the launching device D42. It is an area reached by the game ball launched in, and is also called a second bumping area where the game ball can pass between the game nail 2 and the game nail located next to the game nail 2. be.

FIG. 47 (b) shows the game ball on the straight line 1 of the alternate long and short dash line connecting the center of the game nail 1 which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the first region and the center of the screw BS1. It shows a state in which the center is located and the game ball is in contact with the wall portion D38-7 of the center decoration D38. In this state, the mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 is such that B, which is the diameter of the game ball, overlaps the mounting portion D38-6 100% in front view (completely overlapped state). Is extended to the game area D30 side and the game nail 1 side by the length of Bc with the wall portion D38-7 as a base point. That is, the mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 is extended to the game area D30 side and the game nail 1 side with the wall portion D38-7 as the base point so that Bc> B. Further, in this state, the mounting portion D38-6 is configured so that the game ball is not located on the tapered portion D38-5. That is, the length obtained by subtracting the width of the tapered portion D38-5 from the length of Bc is longer than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, the game ball that collides with the wall portion D38-7 of the center decoration D38 can flow down on the mounting portion D38-6 without protruding from the mounting portion D38-6, thereby allowing the game ball to flow down on the mounting portion D38-6 (FIG. Instead of the irregular movement of the game ball that flows downward while moving in the front and rear directions shown in 41), the game ball is made to flow downward in a stable state without moving in the front-back direction. be able to. Therefore, when the game ball flows down along the wall portion D38-7 of the center decoration D38, the flow of the game ball is stable, which is different from the irregular movement of the game ball flowing down on the tapered portion D38-5. Since the movement of the game ball can be shown to the player, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, since the purpose of the game nail is to improve the fun of the game by making the movement of the game ball irregular, the movement of the game ball can be made irregular by the game nail and the mounting portion D38-6. On the other hand, since the purpose of the wall portion D38-7 of the center decoration D38 is to prevent the game ball from flowing into the center decoration D38, depending on the wall portion D38-7, the game ball may be more than necessary. It is configured so that the movement is not irregular.

Although an example of stabilizing the movement of the game ball by the mounting portion D38-6 and the wall portion D38-7 in the first region is shown, the mounting portion D38-6 located in the second region shown in FIGS. 40 and 44 has been shown. , The wall portion D38-7, the game nail 2 which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the second region, and the screw BS2 are similarly configured. Further, it is located in the third region of the mounting portion D38-6 and the wall portion D38-7 located in the third region shown in FIGS. 40 and 44, the mounting portion D38-6 located in the third region, and the continuous nail 1. The game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6, the screw BS5, has the same configuration.

Further, the center decoration D38 is provided with a large number of screws such as screws BS1, BS2, and BS5. Then, assuming the case where the screws BS1, 2, and 5 are loosened, the countermeasures are configured as follows. A state in which 1/3 × A as a second length, which is 1/3 of a predetermined ratio of A, which is the length of the screws BS1, BS2, and BS5 in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board. In the case where 2/3 × A as the third length of the screw is in a protruding state with respect to the game board D35, the third length from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16. C3 = E-2 / 3 × A as a value obtained by subtracting 2/3 × A, which is the length of the game ball, is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

Further, among the cases where the screws BS1, BS2, and BS5 are loosened, the countermeasures assuming the case where half of the length of the screws is loosened are configured as follows. When half the length of A, which is the length in the longitudinal direction of the screw, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw is in a protruding state of 1/2 × A with respect to the game board D35, the game is played. C2 = E-1 / 2 × A as the value obtained by subtracting 1/2 × A, which is half the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw, from E, which is the length from the board D35 to the transparent plate D16. Is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even if the screw that attaches the center decoration D38 to the game board D35 is loosened in a state where it can stand on its own, the distance from the tip of the protruding screw to the transparent plate D16 can be set. By making it larger (longer) than the diameter, the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game cannot be played, and the interest of the player is reduced. It is possible to prevent it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, it will be described that even if some of the game nails constituting the continuous nails are pulled out from the game board D35, the game balls can flow down without staying. FIG. 48 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is flowing down on the continuous nail 1 in a state where the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 are not pulled out. In order to express the state in which the game nail and the game ball are in contact with each other in an easy-to-understand manner, the game nail shows a cross section of the body portion of the game nail (see FIG. 41 for the body portion). The continuous nail may be composed of three or more game nails, but in FIG. 48 (a), the first game nail, the second game nail, the third game nail, and the fourth game nail An example is a continuous nail 1 composed of four game nails. The continuous nail 1 is provided in the third region and is composed of four game nails arranged substantially linearly in a direction inclined downward to the right with respect to the horizontal. The third game nail and the fourth game nail are planted on the game board D35 in this order. As shown in FIG. 44, the continuous nail 1 is a continuous nail located on the leftmost side in the front view.

Regarding the arrangement in the height direction (vertical direction) of each game nail of the continuous nail 1 in the front view, the first game nail, the second game nail, the third game nail, and the third game nail from the top to the bottom of the game area D30. It is arranged in the order of 4 game nails. That is, in front view, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the third game nail is provided at a higher position than the fourth game nail, and the second game nail is provided at a higher position than the third game nail. The first game nail is provided at a higher position than the second game nail. The height is based on the upper end of the body of each game nail, but the lower end of the body, the center of the body, the upper end of the head (see FIG. 41 for the head), the lower end of the head, and the head. The center of the part (same as the center of the body) may be used as a reference. In the figure, "high" and "low" indicate the vertical direction in the front view.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the distance between the first game nail and the second game nail 1, the distance between the second game nail and the third game nail 2, and the third game nail. The distance 3 between the nail and the fourth game nail is shorter than 1/2 × B, which is half the diameter of the game ball B. The interval 1, the interval 2, and the interval 3 may be the same interval or may be different intervals. Further, the distance 4 between the first game nail and the third game nail and the distance 5 between the second game nail and the fourth game nail are shorter than the distance B which is the diameter of the game ball. .. The intervals 4 and 5 may be the same interval or different intervals. The interval indicates the distance between the body of one game nail and the body of the other game nail.

Next, FIG. 48 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is flowing down on the continuous nail 1 in a state where the second game nail among the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is pulled out. be. It will be described that even if a part of the continuous nail 1 is pulled out in this way, the game ball can flow down without staying. The second game nail of the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is in a state of being pulled out from the game board D35, and the first game nail, the third game nail, and the fourth game nail are not pulled out and the game area. In the state provided in D30, when the game ball flows down on the continuous nail 1, especially when the game ball flows down on the first game nail and the third game nail, the center of the game ball is. Located between the game ball of the first game nail and the game ball of the third game nail, the game ball comes into contact with the body of the first game nail and the body of the third game nail and then flows downstream. It is designed to do.

Here, the second game nail of the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is in a state of being pulled out from the game board D35, and the game ball is the body portion of the first game nail and the body portion of the third game nail. The first game nail and the third game nail are planted on the game board D35 so that the center of the game ball is higher than the upper end of the first game nail in the state of being in contact with. It is configured to do. Further, the second game nail of the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is in a state of being pulled out from the game board D35, and the game ball is the body of the first game nail and the body of the third game nail. The left end of the first game nail is located on the left side of the left end of the game ball, and the right end of the third game nail is located on the left side of the right end of the game ball. The game nail and the third game nail are configured to be planted on the game board D35. With this configuration, even if a part of the continuous nail 1 is pulled out due to repeated collisions of the game balls, the game balls do not stay and flow down toward the first main game start port A10. Can be done. The right end of the fourth game nail is configured to be planted on the game board D35 so as to be located on the right side of the right end of the game ball.

Further, the second game nail of the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is in a state of being pulled out from the game board D35, and the game ball is the body of the first game nail and the body of the third game nail. The first game nail and the third game nail are planted on the game board D35 so that the bottom of the game ball is higher than the lower end of the third game nail in the state of being in contact with the third game nail. It is configured as follows. Here, the bottom of the game ball is a point where the upper and lower straight lines passing through the center of the game ball intersect with the outer edge of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 48 (c). With this configuration, even if a part of the continuous nail 1 is pulled out, the game ball can flow down toward the first main game start port A10 without staying.

The first game nail and the third game nail are planted on the game board D35 so that the bottom of the game ball is lower than the upper end of the third game nail. .. Further, the first game nail and the third game nail are arranged so that the distance between the third game nail and the bottom of the game ball is shorter than the distance between the first game nail and the bottom of the game ball. Is configured to be planted on the game board D35. With this configuration, even if a part of the continuous nail 1 is pulled out, the game ball can flow down without staying.

In this example, the state in which the second game nail among the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is pulled out from the game board D35 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third of the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is described. The same relationship is obtained even when the game nail is pulled out from the game board D35 (for example, the same relationship is obtained when the second game nail, the fourth game nail, and the game ball are in contact with each other). Further, the same relationship is obtained even if any of the game nails constituting the continuous nails except for both ends is pulled out.

Further, a screw BS5 is provided on the mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 closest to the continuous nail 1. Then, assuming the case where the screw BS5 is loosened, the countermeasures are configured as follows. A state in which 1/3 × A as a second length, which is 1/3 of a predetermined ratio of A, which is the length of the screw BS5 in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board. When 2/3 × A as the third length of the screw is in a protruding state with respect to the game board D35, the third length from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16. It is configured so that C3 = E-2 / 3 × A as a value obtained by subtracting a certain 2/3 × A is equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

Further, among the cases where the screw BS5 is loosened, the countermeasures assuming the case where half of the length of the screw is loosened are configured as follows. When half the length of A, which is the length in the longitudinal direction of the screw, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw is in a protruding state of 1/2 × A with respect to the game board D35, the game is played. C2 = E-1 / 2 × A as the value obtained by subtracting 1/2 × A, which is half the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw, from E, which is the length from the board D35 to the transparent plate D16. Is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even if the screw that attaches the center decoration D38 to the game board D35 is loosened in a state where it can stand on its own, the distance from the tip of the protruding screw to the transparent plate D16 can be set. By making it larger (longer) than the diameter, the game ball can flow down (pass) through the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game cannot be played, and the interest of the player is reduced. It is possible to prevent it.

Based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (upper conceptualization), but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts. You may.

The background technology of the pachinko gaming machine (A1), the most popular pachinko gaming machine at present, is a "special pattern" (or main) on the display part such as 7-segment, triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the starting port. When a symbol called (game symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state (normally closed) is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state. This is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game in which the large winning opening (so-called attacker) in the state opens up under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The staging symbol to be produced is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example) in accordance with this. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode. Here, since this mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the above-mentioned design. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden and a highly interesting moving image is displayed instead. One of them is a method to improve the interest of the game by such a directing method. Further, in this type of pachinko gaming machine, the game board is provided with game parts such as a center decoration to help improve the fun of the game.

<< Configuration related to movable accessories >>
Next, a configuration relating to a movable accessory applicable to the present specification will be described, but the description will be omitted or simplified by assigning the same reference numerals to the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment. do. Further, in the present embodiment, a member which has already been described but is not designated in the above-described embodiment is newly designated, but this type of member exists only in the present embodiment. However, it goes without saying that it also exists in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this is not limited to this embodiment, but the same applies to each of the above-described embodiments.

49 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the gaming board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the big winning opening device of a machine, FIG. 52 is a figure which shows the internal structure of the big winning opening device which concerns on this embodiment, and (a) is the front view which shows the internal structure of the big winning opening device. , (B) is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the big winning opening device. FIG. 53 is a view showing the front cover and the first base portion of the large winning opening device according to the present embodiment, (a) is a front view of the front cover as viewed from the back side, and (b) is the first. It is a front view of a base part. FIG. 54 is an image diagram illustrating a modified example according to the present embodiment.

<Summary configuration of pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment>
As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front frame D14 to which the game board is attached is openably and closably attached to the outer frame D12, and the transparent plate D16, the upper ball plate D20, and the speaker are attached to the front frame D14. A door D18 having D24 or the like is attached so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The game board is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. The game area D30 includes a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown), various general winning openings, a first main game start port A10 provided in the substantially center of the lower part of the game area D30, and the first main game start. A large winning opening device C50 having two second main game starting openings B12 and B13 (see FIG. 52) and a large winning opening (first winning opening) C30 provided on the right side of the opening A10, substantially the center of the game area D30. An effect display device SG having a display area over a range one size smaller than the game area D30, and a game ball provided over the weekly edge of the effect display device SG, the outer peripheral surface thereof of which flows down the game area D30. It is located above the center decoration (center frame) D38 and the game area D30, which form a part of the game area D30 by forming the passage (separating the game area D30 and the display surface of the effect display device SG), and produce the effect. Below the movable accessory device YK1 movable on the front side of the display device SG, the light guide plate unit DK including the light guide plate DK1 provided on the front side of the movable accessory device YK1, and the first main game start port A10. It has an out port D36 or the like provided. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the launch handle D44 and the transparent plate D16 are provided.

<Internal structure of the big prize opening device C50>
In explaining the large winning opening device C50, first, the internal structure thereof will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, the large winning opening device C50 has a passing opening B15 formed at the upper right end thereof in which the game ball passes in the direction indicated by the arrow A, and enters in the direction indicated by the arrow B to the left of the passing opening B15. A gate B14 through which the ball (passes) is formed, and a second main game starting port B12 described above is formed below the gate B14. The second main game start port B12 is opened and closed by the appearance and appearance of the second shutter member C30c, which will be described later. On the left side of the gate B14, the above-mentioned second main game starting port B13 is formed on the inclined surface C50A formed in the large winning opening device C50, and the ball can enter in the direction indicated by the arrow C. .. Of these game balls, the game balls that did not enter the second main game start port B13 flow down in the direction indicated by the arrow D and are collected at the out port D36 via the out passage OR1. ing. Further, a large winning opening C30 is provided on the downstream side of the passing port B15 or the gate B14, and the large winning opening C30 is opened and closed by the appearance and appearance of the first shutter member C30b described later.

Further, in the large winning opening device C50, the first passage SR1 for guiding the game ball passing through the passing opening B15 toward the large winning opening C30 and the second shutter member C30c are located at the retracted positions and the second main game. When the start port B12 is in the open state, the game ball that has passed through the gate B14 and the game ball that has flowed down through the first passage (flow path) SR1 and has entered the second main game start port B12 is guided downward. When the second passage SR2 and the second shutter member C30c are located in the closed position and the second main game start port B12 is in the closed state, the game ball or the gate B14 guided by the first passage SR1 is passed. A third passage (guidance passage) SR3 having a fourth rib RB4, which will be described later, and a third passage (guide passage) SR3 having a downwardly inclined fourth rib RB4 that guides the game ball toward the large winning opening C30, and a large game ball provided on the downstream side of the third passage SR3. A branch passage SR4 having a winning passage portion S10 for guiding to the winning opening C30 and an entrance S12a thereof provided on the upstream side of the entrance S10a of the winning passage portion S10 and having another passage portion S12 for guiding the game ball to the out opening D36. And, in the portion where the downstream side of the first passage SR1 and the downstream side of the gate B14 overlap, a merging passage SR5 is provided in which the game balls from the first passage SR1 and the game balls passing through the gate B14 can merge. ..

<Overall configuration of the large winning opening device C50>
Next, each configuration of the large winning opening device C50 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, the large winning opening device C50 has a front portion C51 and a back portion C53 provided behind the front portion C51, and the front portion C51 is a game area D30 in the game board. It is fixed to the lower right of (see FIG. 49). The front portion C51 bears a part of the gauge configuration and the design in the game area D30, and the back portion C53 is inserted into an opening (not shown) formed in the game board, and a part thereof is inserted into the back surface of the game board. It is designed to protrude from.

As shown in FIG. 51, the front surface portion C51 is a flat plate-shaped member that is screwed and fixed to the surface of the game board, and an insertion hole C55A through which the ball passage portion C30a described later is inserted is formed in the central portion thereof. It has a first base portion C55, a front cover C57 that covers the first base portion C55 from the front side, a seal CL attached to the surface of the front cover C57, and the like. The front cover 57 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion C57A and a peripheral wall portion C57B extending from the peripheral edge of the main body portion C57A toward the first base portion C55. By covering the front surface of the first base portion C55 with the front cover C57, a predetermined internal space through which the game ball flowing down the game area D30 can pass is formed. Further, the front cover C57 is formed of a resin such as transparent plastic having light transmission so that the internal space can be visually recognized from the outside, and this internal space is provided in the lower part of the first base portion C55. By being irradiated with light by the LED unit C55B, the visibility can be further improved.

Further, in the seal CL, the design portion CL1 having a design (design) such as a predetermined character or character and the passages SR1 to SR5 described above are lined along these passages SR1 to 5 in order to be visible. It has a transparent portion CL2 that is transparent in shape, and the player can visually recognize the game ball passing through each of the passages SR1 to 5 through the transparent portion CL2. The timing of illuminating the internal space with the LED unit C55B is a timing such as a game state in which the game ball can pass through the internal space, such as the above-mentioned right-handed game (for example, a big hit, a short time, etc.). It may be set to be constantly irradiated, or it may be a timing when a game ball passing through this internal space is detected, and the timing can be appropriately set.

Here, the reference numeral YG in FIG. 53B is a game nail, and the positional relationship between the game nail YG and the large winning opening device C50 is schematically shown). As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the upper end of the front cover C57 (in other words, the upper end of the large winning opening device C50) is close to a pair of game nails YG for guiding the game ball to the gate B14 (for example,). The distance between the game nail YG and the front cover C57 is smaller than the diameter of the tip of the game nail YG, etc.), and if the game nail YG is bent toward the front cover C57 as much as possible, this game nail YG Hits the front cover C57 and prevents it from bending any further. That is, even if an attempt is made to hit the game nail YG with a tool to bend the game nail YG, the game nail YG and the front cover C57 are in close proximity (in other words, when hitting the game nail YG, the tool is used. Because the front cover C57 is in close proximity to the front cover C57), the tool comes into contact with the front cover C57, and the front cover C57 is easily damaged. It becomes difficult to hit with. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game nail YG from being hit and bent by using the above-mentioned tool. By arranging the front cover C57 so as to be close to the game nail YG in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to adjust the game nail YG by fraudulent activity. In the present embodiment, the front cover C57 is provided so as to be close to the game nail YG, but instead of this, a part of the center decoration D38 is shaped to be close to any of the game nails in the game area D30. By setting this, it may be difficult to make adjustments to the game nails. In short, a structure provided in the game area D30 such as the center decoration D38 or the above-mentioned front cover C57 may be brought close to the game nail, or at least a part of the structure may be extended to the vicinity of the game nail. The structure may be shaped and arranged so as to be close to the game nail so that it is difficult to adjust the game nail.

The back surface portion C53 has a second base portion C59 located on the back surface side of the first base portion C55, a shutter drive unit 61, and the like. On the front side of the second base portion B59, a gate passage sensor C60a for detecting a game ball passing through the gate B14 and a game ball located below the gate passage sensor C60b and passing through the second main game start port B12. The winning detection sensor C60b for detecting the above and the winning detection sensor C60c for detecting the game ball passing through the second main game start port B13, which is located on the left side of the gate passage sensor C60a, are attached to the second base portion C59. A shutter drive unit C61 is attached to the back side. The shutter drive unit C61 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat to a closed position where the large winning opening C30 is closed and an open position where the large winning opening C30 is opened by retracting from the closed position by driving a driving unit such as a solenoid (not shown). A closed position for closing the second main game start port B12 and an opening for retracting from this closed position to open the second main game start port B12 by driving the large winning opening shutter member C30b and a drive unit such as a solenoid (not shown). It has a start port shutter member C30c that can move forward and backward at the position. The winning sensor (not shown) of the large winning opening C30 is provided inside the large winning opening C30.

<Structure of front cover and first base part B55>
As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the above-mentioned passage port B15, gate B14, and second main game start port B13 are formed at the upper end of the front cover C57. As shown in FIG. 53A, on the back surface of the front cover C57, a first rib RB1 curved so that the game ball passing through the passage port B15 can be smoothly guided to the downstream side, and the first rib RB1. The second rib RB2 extending downward from the lower end, the third rib RB3 extending downward while facing the second rib RB2 at a larger interval than the game ball, and the downward inclination from the upper end of the third rib RB3. The fourth rib RB4 extending so as to be, and the horizontal portion rb1 extending substantially horizontally above the fourth rib RB4, extending downward from the right end portion of this horizontal portion as seen in FIG. 53, and from the middle thereof in FIG. 53. A second having a connecting portion rb3 having an abutting portion rb2 against which a game ball guided to the third passage SR3 is inclined downward to the right when viewed, and a descending inclined portion rb4 extending downward from the lower end of the connecting portion rb3. The 5 rib RB5, the 6th rib RB6 extending downward to the right of the 3rd rib RB, and the 7th rib RB7 extending downward while facing the 6th rib RB6 at a larger interval than the game ball, etc. A plurality of ribs for forming the ball passage are provided so as to project from the back surface of the front cover C57 toward the first base portion C55. This amount of protrusion is larger than the diameter of the game ball so that the game ball can pass through.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in a state where the front cover C57 covers the first base portion C55 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “covered state”), of the first rib RB1 and the back surface of the front cover C57. The first passage portion SR1 is formed by a portion corresponding to the upper part of the first rib RB1 and a surface of the first base portion C55 facing this portion. Further, in the covered state, the portion corresponding to the second rib RB2, the third rib RB3, and the back surface of the front cover C57 between the second and third ribs RB2, 3 and facing this portion. A second passage portion SR2 is formed by the surface of the first base portion C55. Further, in the covered state, the portion corresponding to the horizontal portion rb1 of the fourth rib RB4 and the fifth rib RB5, and the back surface of the front cover C57 between the fourth rib RB4 and the horizontal portion rb1 and this portion The surface of the first base portion C55 facing the surface constitutes the third passage SR3. Further, in the covered state, the portion of the back surface of the 6th rib RB6, the 7th rib RB7, and the front cover C57 corresponding between the 6th and 7th ribs RB6, 7 and facing this portion. The surface of the first base portion C55 constitutes another passage portion S12 of the branch passage SR4. Further, in the covered state, it corresponds between the downwardly inclined portion rb4 of the fifth rib RB5, the first shutter member C30b in the closed position, and the downwardly inclined portion rb4 and the first shutter member C30b on the back surface of the front cover C57. The winning passage portion S10 of the branch passage SR4 is formed by the portion to be used and the surface of the first base portion C55 facing the portion. Further, in the covered state, a portion of the back surface of the second shutter member C30c in the closed position and the back surface of the front cover C57 corresponding to the upper side of the second shutter member C30c, and the surface of the first base portion C55 facing this portion. With, the fifth passage SR5 is configured.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the third passage SR3 (passes through the third passage SR3) may be abutted against the abutting portion rb2 by its momentum, and the game that abuts against the abutting portion rb2. The ball falls or bounces downward depending on the momentum when it hits. Further, the entrance S10a of the winning passage portion S10 of the branch passage SR4 is located below the abutting portion rb2, and the entrance S12a of the other passage portion S12 of the branch passage SR4 is located upstream of the entrance S10a. Is located. Therefore, the game ball that hits the abutting portion rb2 and falls downward will flow into the winning passage portion S10. Further, the game ball that hits the abutting portion rb2 and bounces off toward the entrance S12a of the other passage portion S12 located upstream of the entrance 10a of the winning passage portion S10, and enters the other passage portion S12 via the entrance S12a. May flow down. Further, the game ball that hits the abutting portion rb2 and bounces off may hit the edge of the entrance S12a of the other passage portion S12 and be bounced again and flow into the winning passage portion S10. Further, the game ball that hits the abutting portion rb2 and bounces off may be returned to the third flow path SR3 again.

The first passage SR1 is provided with a first deceleration unit GS1 for decelerating (decreasing) the speed by interfering with the game ball passing through the first passage SR1. The first deceleration portion GS1 is composed of two rib-shaped protrusions C57a and C55a provided on the back surface of the front cover C57 constituting the first passage SR1 and the front surface of the first base portion C55, respectively. That is, the two protrusions C57a and 57a on the back surface of the front cover C57 constituting the first passage SR1 project toward the surface of the first base portion C55, and on the surface of the first base portion C55 constituting the first passage SR1. The two protrusions C55a project toward the back surface of the front cover C57. These protrusions C55a and C57a are arranged so as to alternate with each other and at intervals from each other. Further, each of these protrusions C55a and C57a extends substantially perpendicular to the curved first rib RB so that the game ball passing through the curved first passage SR1 abuts (interferes with) substantially vertically. They are arranged at different angles from each other.

The third passage SR3 is also provided with a second deceleration unit GS2 for decelerating the speed of the game ball passing through the third passage SR3. The second deceleration portion GS2 has a rib-shaped protrusion C57b protruding from the back surface of the front cover C57 constituting the third passage SR3 toward the surface of the first base portion C55, and a front cover from the surface of the first base portion C55. It is composed of a rib-shaped protrusion C55b protruding toward the back surface of the C57. Further, the protrusion C57b is arranged above the tip of the fourth rib RB4 constituting the third passage SR3, and the protrusion C55b is arranged so as to be located between the protrusion C57b and the second shutter member C30c. ing. These protrusions C55b and C57b are also inclined downward so that the game ball passing through the third passage SR3, in other words, the game ball flowing down so as to roll on the fourth rib RB4, hits substantially vertically. It is arranged so as to extend in the direction perpendicular to the 4-rib RB4.

Further, the fourth passage SR4 is also provided with a third deceleration unit GS3 for decelerating the speed of the game ball passing through the fourth passage SR4. The third deceleration portion GS3 has three rib-shaped protrusions C57c protruding from the back surface of the front cover C57 constituting the fourth passage SR4 toward the surface of the first base portion C55, and the surface of the first base portion C55. It is composed of four rib-shaped protrusions C55c protruding toward the back surface of the front cover C57. These protrusions C57c and C55c are arranged at equal intervals and alternately with each other. These protrusions C57c and C55c are also inclined downward so that the game ball passing through the fourth passage SR4, in other words, the game ball flowing down so as to roll on the first shutter member C30b, abuts substantially vertically. It is arranged so as to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first shutter member C30b.

Further, the fifth passage SR5 is also provided with a fourth deceleration unit GS4 for decelerating the speed of the game ball passing through the fifth passage SR5. The fourth deceleration portion GS4 has a deceleration recess C55d formed on the surface of the first base portion C55 constituting the fifth passage SR5 and the deceleration recess C55d described above from the back surface of the front cover C57 constituting the fifth passage SR5. It is composed of three rib-shaped protrusions C57d protruding toward the bottom surface. The deceleration recess C55d is a recess formed on the surface of the first base portion C55 and has a substantially quadrangular pyramid shape in which the area on the bottom surface side is smaller than the area on the front surface side, and the depth thereof is the depth of the game ball. It is smaller than the outer diameter. Further, the protrusions C57d of the fourth deceleration unit GS are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the left-right direction, and a game ball passing through the fifth passage SR5, in other words, passing through the first passage SR1 and left in FIG. 52. The game balls thrown in the direction are arranged so as to extend in the substantially vertical direction so as to hit them substantially vertically.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52 (b) and 53 (a), the ball flows down at the side end of the large winning opening device C50 in the direction of arrow D without entering the second main game starting opening 13. The above-mentioned out passage OR1 through which the game ball passes is formed. The out passage OR1 is composed of an inclined passage portion SR14 obliquely inclined from the second main starting game opening 13, and a hanging passage portion SR16 extending substantially vertically from the lower end portion of the inclined passage portion SR14. That is, in the covered state, at the side end portion on the back surface side of the front cover C57, the eighth rib RB8 which is inclined downward and is the bottom surface portion of the inclined passage portion SR14, and the outside of the game ball with respect to this rib RB8. The 9th rib RB9, which is provided at a distance larger than the diameter and is provided substantially parallel to the rib RB8 and is the upper surface of the inclined passage portion SR14, and the hanging passage extending downward from the lower end of the 8th rib RB8. The tenth rib RB10 "which is the right side surface portion of the portion SR16 and the eleventh rib RB11 which extends downward from the lower end of the ninth rib RB9 and is the left side surface portion of the hanging passage portion SR16 are provided. The out passage OR1 is formed by RB8 to 11, a portion of the front cover C57 surrounded by these ribs RB8 to 11, and the surface of the first base portion C55 facing this portion. In the embodiment, the 11th rib RB11 is formed with a passage port RB11a through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball that has passed through the out passage OR1 flows down toward the out port D36 via the passage port RB11a. It has become.

Also in this out passage OR1, a fifth deceleration unit GS5 for decelerating the speed of the game ball passing through the out passage OR1 is provided. The fifth deceleration portion GS5 has a rib-shaped protrusion C57e protruding from the back surface of the front cover C57 constituting the out passage OR1 toward the surface of the first base portion C55, and the front cover C57 from the surface of the first base portion C55. It is composed of three rib-shaped protrusions C55e protruding toward the back surface of the above. The protrusions C55e provided on the inclined passage portion S14 are provided on the inclined passage portion S14 so that the game ball flowing down the out passage OR1 abuts substantially vertically on each of these protrusions C55e, respectively. The protrusion C55e extending substantially perpendicular to the hanging passage portion S16 and provided on the upper portion of the hanging passage portion S16 extends substantially perpendicular to the tenth rib RB10, and is the lower end portion of the hanging passage portion S16. The protrusion C55e provided in the vicinity of the passage port RB11a that exits to the left side when viewed from the above is arranged so as to extend substantially parallel to the tenth rib RB. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53B, the upper end of the passage port RB11a is substantially the same as the first shutter member C30b, and the lower end thereof is substantially the same as the lower end portion of the ball passage portion C30a. It is flat and has a shape that extends long up and down. Therefore, the protrusion C55e provided in the vicinity of the passage port RB11a is formed longer than the height direction of the passage port RB11a (in other words, longer than the other protrusions C55e) and faces the passage port RB11a. Regardless of the position of the game ball, it can interfere with the protrusion C55e.

<Operation of the large winning opening device C50 according to this embodiment>
When hitting to the right, the game ball that has flowed down the game area D30 and reached the large winning opening device C50 flows down in the direction of arrow A or arrow B in FIG. 52 (a) and passes through the passage port B15 or the gate B14. When the second main game start port B12 is in the closed state, it rolls on the second shutter member C30c that closes the second main game start port B12 and heads for the third passage SR3. When the second main game start port B12 is in the open state, the ball enters the second main game start port B12 or goes over the second main game start port B12 and heads for the third passage SR3. Further, when the game ball passes through the first passage SR1 or the fifth passage SR5, if the game ball interferes with the protrusions C55a, C57a, C55d or the deceleration recess 55d of any of the first or fourth deceleration portions GS1 and GS4. , The game ball is in a state where its momentum is reduced and flows down toward the downstream side.

By providing the first and fourth deceleration units GS1 and GS4 in this way, the momentum of the game ball flowing down the first or fifth passage SR1 and SR5 can be reduced, so that the second main game start port B12 When is in the open state, it is possible to make it easier to win a game ball in the second main game starting port B12 as compared with the case where the speed is not decelerated by the first and fourth decelerating units GS1 and GS4. Further, by reducing the momentum of the game ball in the first and fourth deceleration units GS1 and GS4, the game ball is less likely to run wild and its behavior can be stabilized. As a result, the behavior of the game ball that has passed through the second main game start port B12 is also stable, and it is possible to prevent chattering or damage of the winning detection sensor C60c that detects the game ball.

The game ball that has passed through the fifth passage SR5 flows down along the third passage SR3, and the game ball that has passed through the third passage SR3 either falls as it is or hits the abutting portion rb2. When the game ball that hits the abutting portion rb and bounces off enters the entrance S12a of the other passage portion S12, it flows down in the other passage portion S12. Further, if the game ball that hits the abutting portion rb and bounces off does not enter due to hitting the peripheral edge of the entrance 12a of the other passage portion S12 or the like, it flows down in the winning passage portion S10. When the game ball interferes with the protrusions C55b and C55b of the second deceleration unit GS2 while the game ball is passing through the third passage SR3, the game ball becomes in a state where its momentum is reduced and toward the downstream side. Flow down.

In this way, by providing the second deceleration unit GS2, the momentum of the game ball flowing down the third passage SR3 can be reduced, so that the game ball passing through the third passage SR3 can easily fall downward as it is. .. Further, even when the abutting portion rb2 is abutted in a state where the momentum is reduced, it is easy to fall downward as it is. Therefore, compared to the case where the speed is not decelerated by the second deceleration unit GS2, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to flow down to the winning passage portion S10 of the branch passage SR4 in which the large winning opening 30 is located in the flowing path. , It is possible to make it difficult to guide the game ball to the other passage portion S12 that guides the game ball to the out port D36. As a result, in the branch passage SR4, the ratio of the game balls passing through the winning passage portion S10 can be higher than the ratio of the game balls passing through the other passage portion S12, and the interest of the game is not impaired. Can be improved. Moreover, since the first or fourth deceleration units GS1 and GS4 are provided on the upstream side of the second deceleration unit GS2, after the momentum is reduced by the first or fourth deceleration units GS1 and GS4 on the upstream side, the momentum is further reduced. The momentum can be weakened by the second deceleration unit GS2, and in this case, the ratio of the game balls passing through the winning passage portion S10 can be further increased than the ratio of the game balls passing through the other passage portion S12.

The game ball flowing down the winning passage portion S10 of the branch passage SR4 via the third passage SR3 enters the large winning opening C30 when the large winning opening C30 is in the open state, and the large winning opening C30 is in the closed state. When it is at, it rolls on the first shutter member C30b. At this time, when the game ball interferes with the protrusions C55c and C57d of the third deceleration unit GS3, the game ball becomes in a state where its momentum is reduced and flows down toward the downstream side.

By providing the third deceleration section GS3 in this way, the momentum of the game ball flowing down the winning passage section S10 can be reduced, so that the time for the game ball to roll on the first shutter member C30b is lengthened. This makes it easier for the game ball to stay on the first shutter member C30b. As a result, at the time of a big hit, it is possible to easily generate a so-called excess prize, such as entering more game balls than the specified number in one round (for example, 9), and to improve the interest of the game. Can be done. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine equipped with the small hit rush as in the present embodiment, as described above, the small hit in the present embodiment is only one round, and is compared with the large hit. Since the opening time of the big winning opening C30 is short, in general, the number of game balls that enter the large winning opening C30 in one round of small hits is larger than the number of balls that enter the large winning opening C30 in one round of big hits. Will also decrease. However, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to easily generate an excess prize as described above, the hobby of the small hit rush game is compared with the pachinko gaming machine which does not have the above-mentioned reduction units SG1 to SG4. Can be improved.

<Modification example of front cover C57 etc.>
In the present embodiment, the upper end portion of the front cover C57 is brought close to the game nail YG, but instead, the upper end portion of the front cover C57 is extended upward so that the upper end portion is on the front side of the game nail YG. It may be provided so as to be positioned, and after making the upper end portion transparent, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), a plurality of grit lines orthogonal to each other in vertical and horizontal directions may be attached to the upper end portion. In this case, since the position of the game nail YG with respect to the board surface of the game board is clarified by this grit line, the game nail YG is bent by cheating or the like as shown in FIG. 54 (b) (adjustment of the game nail). Even if it is done), this bent state becomes obvious, and this kind of fraudulent activity can be prevented.

In the above example, the grit wire is directly attached to the front cover C57, but instead of this, the grit wire may be attached to the corresponding portion of the seal CL attached to the front cover C57, for example. Further, the place where the grit line is arranged is not limited to the front cover C57 as described above, and for example, a part of the center decoration D38 is extended so as to be located on the front side of any of the game nails in the game area D30. , Attach a grit wire directly to this part, attach a transparent sticker with a grit wire to this part, or put a grit on the back side of the transparent plate 16 at the place corresponding to the game nail you want to check. A transparent sticker with a line may be attached. In short, a mark that serves as a reference for the position of the game nail, such as a grit line, may be attached to the front side of any of the game nails in the game area D30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusions C55a, C57a and the like in the deceleration portions SG1 to 4 are formed in a rib shape, but the shape is not limited to this, and an appropriate shape may be adopted. It is possible, and it goes without saying that the number of these protrusions and the arrangement location can be appropriately set. Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned protrusions C55a, C57a and the like are formed so as to extend substantially perpendicular to the front cover C57 and the first base portion C55, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the protrusions C55a, etc. The tip portion of C57a or the like may be formed so as to be inclined toward the upstream side or the downstream side of the base end portion. In short, if it is possible to interfere with the flowing game ball, the shape, size, number, tilt angle, placement position, etc. can be appropriately set according to the specifications and the like. Further, the arrangement points of the deceleration units SG1 to 4 are not limited to the inside of the large winning opening device C50, and may be arranged in the passage (flow path) of the game ball where deceleration is required.

<Structure of movable accessory device YK1>
Next, the movable accessory device YK1 will be described. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing the movable accessory device YK1 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 56 is for explaining the positional relationship between the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment and the light guide plate. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment, FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing a driving unit of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 59 is a perspective view. It is a figure explaining the operation of the movable accessory device which concerns on this embodiment, and FIG. 60 is a front view explaining the movable range of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device which concerns on this embodiment, and is a figure. 61 is a diagram illustrating a sensor that detects the position of a movable accessory device according to the present embodiment and a detection state of the sensor, and FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a logo of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initial operation process of the accessory, FIG. 63 is a perspective view explaining the guide member of the movable accessory device which concerns on this embodiment, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view which explains the guide member which concerns on this embodiment. It is an image diagram explaining the action.

As shown in FIG. 55, the movable accessory device YK1 is provided on the front side of the frame-shaped base portion YK3 and the frame-shaped base portion YK3, and is provided along the left and right vertical frame portions YK5 of the frame-shaped base portion YK3. A long plate-shaped movable base portion YK10 that can move up and down and extends to the left and right, and a length that is located on the front side of the movable base portion YK10 and can move along the longitudinal direction of the movable base portion YK10 and extends to the left and right. It has a plate-shaped logo accessory (movable production unit) YK12 and the like. The logo accessory may be referred to as a movable accessory.

Decorative portions YK4 with designs such as characters and characters are provided on the front side of the left and right vertical frame portions YK5 of the frame-shaped base portion YK3, respectively. Further, in each of the vertical frame portions YK5, a spiral shaft (cutting bolt) YK6 extends vertically between the upper and lower horizontal frame portions YK7 of the frame-shaped base portion YK3 on the back surface side of each decorative portion YK4. It is provided in.

The frame-shaped base portion YK3 is provided on the back side of the center decoration (center frame) D38. That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the transparent plate D16, the light guide plate DK1, the center decoration D38, and the movable accessory device YK1 are arranged in this order from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 56, the front surface of the logo accessory YK12 of the movable accessory device YK1 is located between the front and back of the center decoration D38 (in other words, both sides of the logo accessory YK12). The surface and the inner surface of the center decoration D38 face each other), and the positional relationship is close to the light guide plate DK1 (for example, the positional relationship close enough to interfere with the light guide plate DK1 when the logo accessory YK12 vibrates). It has become. The right figure of FIG. 56 schematically shows the above-mentioned positional relationship, and the left figure of FIG. 56 is simply shown in order to make it easy to understand where the positional relationship is seen from the above-right figure. (In the figure on the left, the description of the logo accessory in the figure on the right is omitted).

As shown in FIG. 57, screwed portions YK10a screwed into a pair of spiral shafts YK6 of the frame-shaped base portion YK3 are provided at both ends of the movable base portion YK10, and a drive source for a motor or the like (not shown) is provided. The movable base portion YK10 moves up and down along the spiral shaft YK6 by the rotation of the spiral shaft YK6 to which the power is transmitted from the above. Further, a substantially rectangular insertion port YK10b is formed in a portion of the movable base portion YK10 on the left side of the central portion in a front view. In the present embodiment, the movable base portion YK10 is moved up and down by the spiral shaft YK6 and the screwed portion YK10a. It may be moved up and down by driving the gear, and it goes without saying that the drive portion for moving the movable base portion YK10 up and down, the power transmission mechanism, and the like are not particularly limited.

The surface of the logo accessory YK12 attached to the movable base portion YK10 is decorated with logos such as characters and characters of pachinko gaming machines. On the back surface of the logo accessory YK, an insertion piece (not shown) inserted into the insertion port YK10b of the movable base portion YK10 is provided. As shown in FIG. 58, this insertion piece is fixed to the rack gear RG1 provided on the back side of the movable base portion YK10, and is combined with the rack gear RG1 by the rotation of the pinion gear PN1 meshed with the rack gear RG1. The logo accessory YK12 moves left and right with respect to the movable base portion YK10.

Therefore, the insertion piece of the logo accessory YK12 can be moved until it hits the left end or the right end of the insertion port YK10b of the movable base portion YK10 (in other words, the left end and the right end of these insertion openings YK10b are the logo accessory, respectively. (It is a left stopper and a right stopper that prevent further movement of YK12), and the position where this insertion piece hits the left end or the right end of the insertion port YK10b is the maximum of the logo accessory YK12 with respect to the movable base portion YK10. It is the movement range (maximum movable range). In the present embodiment, as schematically shown by the broken line in FIG. 60, the logo accessory YK12 is on the left side of the center decoration D38 forming the inner partition of the substantially circular game area D30 in the left direction. In the right direction, it is possible to move to the right side of the center decoration D38, and the logo accessory YK12 has a structure that can hit (interfere with) the center decoration D38.

In the present embodiment, the maximum movement range of the logo accessory YK12 is the range on the left side and the right side of the center decoration D38, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the left direction, the right side of the center decoration D38. (Inside the left side of the center decoration D38), in the right direction, the range on the left side of the center decoration D38 (inside the right side of the center decoration D38) may be set as the maximum movement range. In this case, when the logo accessory YK12 is located at the center in the vertical direction inside the center decoration D38 (for example, the position in FIG. 59 (b)), it moves to the maximum in the left-right direction. Even if it does, it cannot interfere with the center decoration D38, but the logo accessory YK12 is at the initial position shown in FIG. 60 (the upper part in the vertical direction inside the center decoration D38. In the case of being located at), the inner diameter in the left-right direction inside the center decoration D38 is narrower in the upper part than in the central part in the above-mentioned vertical direction, so that the logo accessory YK12 is maximized in the left-right direction. If it moves, it may interfere with the center decoration D38.

As shown in FIG. 57, the above-mentioned pinion gear PN1 is driven in the left-right direction (clockwise direction (clockwise direction) around the gear axis by driving a motor YK17 attached to a fixed base portion YK16 fixed to a frame-shaped base portion YK3. Hereinafter, it is possible to rotate simply in the "CW direction") and in the counterclockwise direction (hereinafter, simply referred to as "CCW direction"). In the present embodiment, the motor TK17 is driven in the CCW direction. In this case, the logo accessory YK12 moves to the left, and when the motor YK17 is driven in the CW direction, the logo accessory YK12 moves to the right (see FIG. 61). In the embodiment, the drive portion of the logo accessory YK12 is configured by the above-mentioned pinion gear PN1, rack gear RG1, motor YK17, spiral shaft YK6, screwed portion YK10a of the movable base portion YK10, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 58, the fixed base portion YK16 has a plate shape extending to the left and right, and a prismatic rail RL1 extending to the left and right is provided on the surface side thereof. Then, the YK12 rack gear GR1 to which the logo accessory YK12 is fixed via the insertion piece is attached so as to be movable in the left-right direction along the rail RL1. Further, the fixed base portion YK16 is formed with a concave groove YK16a along the rail RL1, and in the groove 16a, the detection piece GR1a projecting from the left end portion of the rack gear GR1 toward the fixed base portion YK16. Is inserted, and the detection piece GR1a moves left and right along the concave groove YK16a as the rack gear GR1 moves left and right.

On the surface of the fixed base portion YK16, a left movable position sensor SN1 for detecting that the logo accessory YK12 is located on the left side with respect to the movable base portion YK10 is provided at a position corresponding to the left end portion of the rail RL1. The initial position sensor SN2 for detecting that the logo accessory YK12 is located at the initial position along the right side of the left movable position sensor SN1, and the logo accessory YK12 are located on the right side with respect to the movable base portion. The right movable position sensor SN3 for detecting the movement and the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 for confirming the movable direction (either of the left and right directions) of the logo accessory YK12 are arranged in this order at intervals from each other. Of these sensors SN1 to 4, for sensors SN1 to 3, the above-mentioned detection piece GR1a detects the position of the logo accessory YK12 in the left-right direction by putting these sensors SN1 to 3 in a light-shielding state and a light-receiving state. Regarding the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4, the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 detects the movable direction of the logo accessory YK12 by setting the sensor SN4 in a light-shielding state and a light-receiving state. That is, in the present embodiment, the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 functions as a detection piece detected by the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4.

The left movable position sensor SN1 uses a photosensor having a light emitting element HK and a light receiving element JK arranged above and below the concave groove YK16a, respectively. Further, the initial position sensor SN2 and the right position sensor SN3 also use a photosensor having an issuing element and a light receiving element as in the above-mentioned left movable position sensor SN1. On the other hand, the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 has a light emitting element (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the hook member FK through which the right end portion of the rack gear GR1 can pass, and the light emitting element on the surface of the fixed base portion YK16. A photosensor having a light receiving element provided at a position corresponding to the above is used. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor as described above is used as each of the sensors SN1 to 4, but instead of this, an appropriate sensor such as a reflection sensor or a magnetic sensor may be used, and it is necessary. Needless to say, a sensor capable of detecting the position of the logo accessory YK12 may be used. Needless to say, the same applies to the other sensors in the present embodiment.

In the normal state, the logo accessory YK12 is located at the initial position, which is the upper part of the frame-shaped base portion YK3 and is substantially the center position, as shown in FIG. 59A, and during the above-mentioned small hit rush hour. In, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), it is located at a movable position which is a lower part of the frame-shaped base portion YK3. Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 (b) and 59 (c), the logo accessory YK12 moves left and right when falling from the initial position toward the movable position (lowermost position). .. Regarding the position of the logo accessory YK12, for example, the position shown in FIG. 59 (c) is set as the initial position in the normal state, and the position shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) during the small hit rush hour. It goes without saying that the movable position may be set, and the gaming state corresponding to the above-mentioned initial position and movable position may be not only during normal time and small hit rush hour, but also during big hit time and reach time. .. In short, it is possible to appropriately change the position of the logo accessory YK12 in which game state, and the logo accessory is in a predetermined game state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state, big hit game). State (sometimes simply called "big hit"), small hit game state (sometimes simply called "small hit"), game state with the main game time reduction flag on, reach state, etc.) It suffices to be positioned at a predetermined position (either up, down, left or right) corresponding to the above. Further, the logo accessory YK12 can be made movable at the timings (a) to (n2) in FIG. 168. With such a configuration, various actions of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG are further emphasized, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when performing the staging operation, the logo accessory YK12 has a left movable position shown in FIG. 59 (b) with respect to an initial position substantially at the center of the movable base portion YK 10 as shown in FIG. 59 (a). And the right movable position shown in FIG. 59 (c). In the present embodiment, the movement of the logo accessory YK12 in the left-right direction when performing the staging operation is detected by the left movable position, in other words, the left movable position sensor SN1 shown in FIG. 59 (b). It is the state where it is located on the leftmost side, and the right movable position shown in FIG. 59 (c), in other words, the state detected by the right movable position sensor SN3 is the state where it is located on the leftmost side. .. That is, as described above, the logo accessory YK12 has a structure that can be moved to the left side of the center decoration D38 in the left direction and to the right side of the center decoration D38 in the right direction. When performing the operation, it is located on the right side of the center decoration D38 in the left movable position and on the left side of the center decoration D38 in the right movable position. The object moves left and right within the range of the left movable position and the right movable position.

As the effect of the logo accessory YK12 in the present embodiment, for example, while moving downward together with the movable base portion YK10, the logo accessory YK12 may move left or right with respect to the movable base portion YK12, or may be moved to the initial position in FIG. 59 (a). At a certain time, a small amount of reciprocating motion (left and right rattling motion) to the left and right with respect to the movable base portion YK10, or a small amount of reciprocating motion of the movable base portion YK10 up and down causes the logo accessory YK12 to move. It is possible to make it appear to reciprocate up and down (rattle movement up and down), but it is not limited to this as the production operation, and it goes without saying that the timing to be performed can be set appropriately. ..

Further, the logo accessory YK12 can be moved up and down by the movable base portion YK10 and can be moved left and right with respect to the movable base portion YK10. Instead, the logo accessory YK12 is movable base portion YK10. In addition to being movable to the left and right, it may be provided so that it can be moved up and down with respect to the movable base portion YK10, or it may be moved so as to draw an arc. In the portion YK10, the moving direction thereof is not particularly limited as long as it can be moved in the center decoration D38. Further, in the present embodiment, the logo accessory YK12 is applied as the movable effect unit, but instead of this, for example, the movable effect display device (in this case, the size is such that the above-mentioned effect display device SG is movable). The size of the logo accessory YK12 of the present embodiment or smaller than this is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing the movable range), and if it is a movable accessory such as the light guide plate DK1 described later, it is a pachinko machine. Needless to say, it can be applied as appropriate according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

<Detection of logo character YK12>
Next, the detection of the logo accessory YK related to each of the above-mentioned sensors SN1 to SN4 will be described. In the present embodiment, when the detection piece GR1a of the rack gear GR1 to which the logo accessory YK12 is fixed and the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 set any of the sensors SN1 to 4 in a light-shielding state, the logo accessory YK12 is used as the sensor. When the detection state is set to detect that the user is in the corresponding position and the above-mentioned detection piece GR1a is in the light receiving state in which the sensors SN1 to 4 are not shielded from light, the sensors SN1 to 4 use the logo accessory YK12. It is in a non-detected state that has not been detected. Needless to say, as the detection state and the non-detection state, the light-shielding state may be set to the non-detection state and the light-receiving state may be set to the non-detection state. In short, if it is possible to determine where the logo accessory YK12 is located, the location of the sensor and whether to set the light-shielding state or the light-receiving state of the sensor to the detection state or the non-detection state are appropriately set. It is possible.

Here, the light-shielding state and the light-receiving state of the detection piece GR1a and the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 for each sensor will be described. FIG. 61A is a diagram schematically showing the positional relationship of the sensors SN1 to 4 for detecting the logo accessory YK12 provided in the movable base portion YK10, and FIG. 61B is a diagram in which the logo accessory YK12 is fixed. It is a figure which shows the movement range of the detection piece GR1a of the rack gear GR1, (c) is a figure which shows the detection state and the non-detection state of each sensor SN1 to 4, and (d) is the figure which the logo accessory YK12 is a left movable position. It is a figure which shows the state which is located in the right movable position.

FIG. 61B is a diagram showing the left-right movement range of the detection piece GR1a (in other words, the left-right movement range of the logo accessory YK12) as described above, and in this figure, the detection piece GR1a is shown. The movement range in the left-right direction is divided into sections (1) to (9). That is, as the range of movement of the detection piece GR1a in the left-right direction, the position where the detection piece GR1a abuts on the left end (left stopper) of the concave groove YK16a (see FIG. 58) of the fixed base portion YK16 (in other words, in the left direction). Position of maximum movement range. At this time, the left movable position sensor SN1 is in a light-shielded state and the logo accessory YK12 is located on the left side of the left movable position). The movable position sensor SN1 is in a light-shielded state, and the logo accessory YK12 is located at the left movable position shown in FIG. 61 (d)), and the detection piece GR1a is the final position of this section (1). The section (2) in which the detection piece GR1a has moved from the final position of this section (2) to the position in front of the initial position sensor SN2, the section (3) in which the detection piece GR1a has moved to just before exiting the left movable position sensor SN1. The section (4), the detection piece, which has moved from the final position of this section (3) to the position where the initial position sensor SN2 is shielded from light, and the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 has moved to the position immediately before the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 is shielded from light. GR1a has moved slightly to the right from the final position of this section (4) (at this time, the initial position sensor SN2 is in a light-shielded state, and the logo accessory YK12 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 61 (a). The position where the right end portion 1b of the rack gear GR1 shields the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 (in the subsequent sections (6) to (9), the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 continues to maintain the light-shielding state). The section (5) moved to, the section (6) in which the detection piece GR1a moved from the final position of this section (5) to just before passing through the initial position sensor SN2, and the detection piece GR1a moved to the right from the final position of this section (6). In the section (7) that moved to just before the movable position sensor SN3, the detection piece GR1a moved slightly to the right from the final position of this section (7) (in this case, the right movable position sensor SN3 is a light-shielding position. The logo accessory YK12 is located at the right movable position shown in FIG. 61 (d)) and the detection piece GR1a is located at the right end (right stopper) of the concave groove YK16a from the final position of this section (8). It is divided into nine sections such as the section (9) up to the position where it hits (in other words, the position of the maximum movement range in the right direction).

Further, in each of the above sections (1) to (9), the detection status of each of the sensors SN1 to 4 is as shown in FIG. 61 (c). That is, in the section (1), only the left movable position sensor SN1 is in the detection state (the left movable position sensor SN1 is in a light-shielded state by the detection piece GR1a), and the initial position sensor SN2, the right movable position sensor SN3, and the movable direction position sensor SN4. Each has a detection pattern of a non-detection state (a light receiving state in which each of the sensors SN2 to 3 is not shielded by the detection piece GR1a or the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1). Even in the section (2), the detection pattern is that only the left movable position sensor SN1 is in the detection state, and in these sections (1) and (2), it is detected that the logo accessory YK12 is located in the left movable position. It is in a state of being. In the section (3), the detection pattern is that all the sensors SN1 to 4 are in the non-detection state, and the sensors SN1 to 4 cannot grasp where the logo accessory YK12 is, but the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 is used. By the non-detection state, it can be grasped that the logo accessory YK12 is located to the left of the initial position.

Further, in the section (4), only the initial position sensor SN3 is in the detection state, and in the sections (5) and (6), the initial position sensor SN3 and the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 are in the detection state. In these sections (5) to (6), it is detected that the logo accessory YK12 is located at the initial position. In the section (7), the detection pattern is that only the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 is in the detection state, and the other sensors SN1 to 3 cannot grasp where the logo accessory YK12 is, but the movable direction confirmation in the detection state. The sensor SN4 is in a state where it can be grasped that the logo accessory YK12 is located to the right of the initial position.

Further, in the sections (8) and (9), the right movable position sensor SN3 and the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 are in the detection state, and in these sections (8) and (9), the logo accessory YK12 is on the right. It is in a state of detecting that it is located in a movable position.

Here, in the above sections (3) and (7), the left movable position sensor SN1, the initial position sensor SN1 and the right movable position sensor SN3 are all in a non-detection state, and these sensors SN1 to 3 have a detection pattern. , It is not possible to accurately grasp where the logo character YK12 is. However, in the above section (7), the right movable position sensor SN4 is in the detection state as described above, and it can be understood that the logo accessory YK12 is located to the right of the initial position. Corresponding to this, in the above section (3), the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 is in the non-detection state. Therefore, in this state, the logo accessory YK12 is located to the left of the initial position. Can be grasped. That is, the detection / non-detection pattern of each sensor SN1 to 4 in the section (3) is "x, x, x, x", while the detection / non-detection of each sensor SN1 to 4 in the section (7). The pattern is "x, x, x, 〇", and each detection pattern is different. Therefore, due to the difference in this pattern, the left movable position sensor SN1, the initial position sensor SN1 and the right movable position sensor SN3 are all different. Even in the non-detection state, the approximate position of the logo accessory TK12 (whether it is to the left or to the right of the initial position) can be grasped. In other words, in the present embodiment, when all the sensors SN1 to 4 are in the non-detection state, the logo accessory (movable accessory) YK12 is located to the left of the initial position (all sensors are in the non-detection state). It is determined (determined) that the sensor is located at a predetermined position (corresponding to the above).

In this way, by providing the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4, even if each of the sensors SN1 to 3 for detecting the position of the logo accessory YK12 is in the non-detection state, the approximate position of the logo accessory YK can be grasped. be able to. Further, since the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 can grasp the approximate position of the logo accessory YK, all the sensors of the sensors SN1 to 3 that detect the position of the logo accessory YK are not in the non-detection state. Since it is not necessary to provide many sensors of this type, increase the length of the detection piece 1a, or increase the number of detection pieces, the number of parts can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide more sensors than necessary, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated due to the increase in the number of sensors.

Next, the initial operation process (process of returning to the initial position) of the logo accessory YK12 by the sub-control board (which is also the drive control unit) S will be described. In the present embodiment, in the sub-control board S, the logo role is used at the time of the position check for confirming the position of the logo accessory YK12 performed at the turning point of the game such as the customer waiting demonstration, the big hit, the change start time, and the change stop time. When the object YK12 is not in the initial position (initial position sensor SN3 is not detected) even after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed in a situation where the object YK12 should be located in the initial position (for example, a normal state). , And in a predetermined situation such as when the power is restored, the initial operation process of the logo accessory YK12 as shown in FIG. 62 is performed.

That is, the sub-control board S first determines whether or not the logo accessory YK12 is located in any of the sections (4) to (6) (at any of the initial positions) according to the detection patterns of the sensors SN1 to 4. If the logo accessory YK12 is not in the initial position (No in step 3551), it is determined whether or not the logo accessory YK12 is in the left position. When it is determined that the logo accessory YK12 is located at the left end position, in other words, the logo accessory YK12 is located in the section (1) or (2) according to the detection pattern of each sensor SN1 to 4 (Yes in step 3552). ), The sub-control board S calculates the number of first steps of the motor YK17 required for the section (1) or (2) to the initial position (for example, from the section (4); the same applies hereinafter), and the motor is only this value. A command (operation request for the logo accessory YK) for driving the YK 17 in the CW direction is determined. When the motor YK17 receiving this command is driven in the CW direction by the predetermined number of steps, the logo accessory YK12 moves to the right and returns to the initial position (step 3553).

Further, when the logo accessory YK12 is not at the left end position (N0 in step 3552), the sub-control board S has a section according to the detection pattern of the logo accessory YK12 at the right end position, in other words, the sensors SN1 to 4. If it is determined that the logo accessory YK12 is located in (8) or (9) (Yes in step 3554), the sub-control board S is required from the section (8) or (9) to the initial position. The number of second steps of the motor YK17 is calculated, and the command to drive the motor YK17 in the CCW direction is determined by this value. When the motor YK17 receiving this command is driven in the CCW direction by the predetermined number of steps, the logo accessory YK12 moves to the left and returns to the initial position (step 3555). In the present embodiment, if the logo accessory YK12 is located in any of the sections (4) to (6), it is treated as being located at the initial position, but the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 is used. In the sections (5) and (6) which are in the detection state and are located slightly to the right of the initial position, it may be determined that the position is the right end position and the control may be performed in the same manner as in step 3555. In this case, the deviation of the initial position can be prevented, and the initial position can be finely adjusted.

Also in step 3554, when the logo accessory YK12 is not located at the right end position, that is, as a result of the determination so far, the logo accessory YK12 is not located at the initial position, the left end position, or the right end position. In this case, the sub-control board S determines whether or not the logo accessory YK12 is outside the sensor (to the left). When the logo accessory YK12 is outside the sensor (to the left), in other words, when it is determined by the detection pattern of each sensor SN1 to 4 that the logo accessory YK12 is located in the section (3) (Yes in step 3557). The sub-control board S calculates the number of third steps of the motor YK17 required from the section (3) to the initial position, and determines a command to drive the motor YK17 in the CW direction by this value. When the motor YK17 receiving this command is driven in the CW direction by the predetermined number of steps, the logo accessory YK12 moves to the right and returns to the initial position (step 3557).

On the other hand, when the logo accessory YK12 is not outside the sensor (to the left) (No in step 3556), the logo accessory YK12 is outside the sensor (to the right), in other words, the section is determined by the detection pattern of each sensor SN1 to 4. Since the logo accessory YK12 is located in (7), the sub-control board S calculates the number of fourth steps of the motor YK17 required from the section (7) to the initial position, and this value. Only the command to drive the motor YK17 in the CCW direction is determined. When the motor YK17 receiving this command is driven in the CCW direction by the predetermined number of steps, the logo accessory YK12 moves to the left and returns to the initial position (step 3558). In the above-described embodiment, when the logo accessory YK12 is returned to the initial position, the motor YK17 is driven by the required number of steps from the staying section to the initial position. Needless to say, instead of calculating the number of steps, the motor YK17 may be continuously driven until the initial position sensor SN3 detects the detection piece GR1a.

Here, when the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 is not provided as in the present embodiment, the sensors SN1 to 3 for detecting the position of the logo accessory YK12 as in the above sections (3) and (7). In a state where the position cannot be detected and the approximate position cannot be grasped, for example, the logo accessory YK12 is moved in either the left direction or the right direction by the above-mentioned maximum movement range, and the logo accessory is used. After ensuring that the YK12 is located at either the left or right end, it is necessary to control the return to the initial position from there. In this case, since the moving distance of the logo accessory YK12 becomes long, the time for returning to the initial position becomes long and the driving time of the motor YK17 also becomes long (Situation 1). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the movable direction position sensor SN4 is provided, the sensors SN1 to 3 that detect the position of the logo accessory YK12 cannot detect the position when performing the initial operation processing. Even so, it is possible to grasp whether it is to the left or right from the initial position, and it is sufficient to drive the motor YK17 by the shortest distance from that position to the initial position, so the logo accessory YK12 that is out of the initial position can be used. It can be returned to the initial position in the minimum time, and the load on the motor YK17 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the logo accessory YK12 moves by the maximum movement range, the logo accessory YK12 interferes with the center decoration D38 as described above. If the logo accessory YK12 is moved by the maximum movement range during the initial operation process, the logo accessory YK12 may interfere with the center decoration D38 depending on the operating condition (upper and lower position) of the movable base portion YK10. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to move the logo accessory YK12 within the maximum moving range as described above, so that such a situation can be prevented. As a result, when setting the movable range of the logo accessory YK12 with respect to the movable base portion YK10, it is not necessary to consider the interference with the center decoration D38, so that the degree of freedom in designing the movable range can be improved. ..

Next, the guide member of the movable accessory device YK1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, a guide member YK20 projecting toward the movable base portion YK10 is provided on the front surface side of the right end portion of the movable base portion YK10. The facing surface YK20a of the guide member YK20 facing the movable base portion YK10 is a tapered surface portion YK20b whose wall thickness gradually becomes narrower in the vertical direction from the middle to the lower portion. When the tapered surface portion YK20b comes into contact with the right end portion of the front surface of the movable base portion YK10 that is about to return to the initial position, the movable base portion YK10 is pressed back so as to be pushed back.

That is, as schematically shown in FIG. 64, the movable base portion YK10 located below the guide member YK20 is located at the initial position (the height at which the logo accessory YK12 is located inside the upper end of the center decoration (center frame) D38). When it rises to return, it comes into contact with the tapered surface portion YK20b of the guide member YK20, so that the right end portion of the movable base portion YK10 slides along the tapered surface portion YK20b. As a result, the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base portion YK10 that have returned to the initial positions are pressed while being pressed toward the back surface. In the present embodiment, the guide member YK20 comes into contact with the right end portion of the front surface of the movable base portion YK10, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the guide member YK20 is included in the front surface of the movable base portion YK10. It may be in contact with the left end portion or the like, and the point is that the contact position is not particularly limited as long as it is a location on the front surface of the movable base portion YK10 that avoids the logo accessory YK12. Further, if the guide member YK20 cannot be brought into contact with any of the front surfaces of the movable base portion YK10 due to the problem of installation space, the same applies even if the guide member YK20 is brought into contact with the front surface of the logo accessory YK12 or the like. Although it exerts an action and effect, it is preferable that the front surface of the movable base portion YK10 is in contact with the guide member YK20.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned guide member YK20, the guide member YK20 presses the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base portion YK10 toward the back side at the initial positions of the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base portion YK10. , The logo accessory YK12 and the movable base portion YK10 can be stably positioned at the initial position. Moreover, as in the present embodiment, the logo accessory YK12 and the light guide plate DK1 are close to each other (see FIG. 56), and the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base portion YK10 are left, right, up and down as described above. It is possible to prevent the logo accessory YK12 from interfering with the light guide plate DK1 even if an effect operation such as a rattling operation is performed.

<< Configuration related to the back side of the movable accessory >>
Next, the configuration regarding the back side of the movable accessory, which is applicable to the present specification, will be described in detail below. The configuration described in detail below can be applied to any shape as long as it is a movable accessory that can be located on the front side of the staging display device SG. In the embodiments described in detail below, the description thereof will be omitted or simplified by assigning the same reference numerals to the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments. Further, in the present embodiment, a member which has already been described but is not designated in the above-described embodiment is newly designated, but this type of member exists only in the present embodiment. However, it goes without saying that it also exists in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this is not limited to this embodiment, but the same applies to other embodiments.

First, FIG. 65 is a front side view and a back side view of a part of the movable accessory device YK1 included in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the figure, FIG. 57 is a part of the movable accessory device YK1 described above, and the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base portion YK10 are illustrated. The logo accessory YK12, the movable base portion YK10, and (the portion shown in FIG. 65 in the movable accessory device YK1) may be collectively referred to as a movable accessory.

<Front surface part YK30>
First, (a) in the upper part of the figure is a diagram showing the front side of the movable accessory. In the figure, the front side (the part that can be visually recognized from the front view) of the movable accessory when viewed from the player is referred to as the front side. On the front side of the movable accessory, the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base portion YK10 are mainly visible, and the entire surface portion shown in (a) is referred to as the front surface portion YK30. Further, the movable base portion YK10 has a plurality of litable accessory lamps YK21, which are lit at the time of initial operation after the power is turned on or at the time of the effect operation (sometimes referred to as the execution of the character effect). It is configured as. The movable accessory according to the present embodiment has a case of being driven as an initial operation after the power is turned on and a case of being driven as an accessory effect (effect operation) corresponding to the execution of the symbol variation, and has an initial operation. The lighting pattern of the bonus lamp YK21 that can be executed as the bonus effect may be configured not to be executed as the bonus effect, or the lighting pattern of the bonus lamp YK21 that can be executed as the initial operation is executed as the bonus effect. It may be configured to obtain.

The combination of "lighting / blinking / extinguishing" and the combination of "lighting / extinguishing" in the accessory lamp YK21 may be referred to as a lighting pattern, and specifically, the following may be referred to as a lighting pattern.
(1) Combination of lighting / blinking / extinguishing of multiple lamps at a certain timing (2) Time-series lighting / blinking / extinguishing pattern of one lamp (3) Time series of multiple lamps The lighting / blinking / extinguishing pattern that changes with the above (1) to (3) does not have to include blinking.

Further, the front side of the logo accessory YK12 (the front surface portion YK30 corresponding to the logo accessory YK12) may also be configured to have a plurality of accessory lamps YK21. Further, on the front side of the movable base portion YK10 (front side surface portion YK30 corresponding to the movable base portion YK10), a plurality of countersunk screws YK22 for fixing various members of the movable accessory are used. Details of the countersunk screw YK22 will be described later.

<Back surface part YK40>
Next, (b) at the bottom of the figure is a diagram showing the back side of the movable accessory. In the figure, the back side (the part that cannot be visually recognized from the front view) of the movable accessory when viewed from the player is referred to as the back side.

The entire surface portion shown in (b) is referred to as a back surface portion YK40. In other words, the back side surface portion YK40 is a surface portion on the opposite side of the front side surface portion YK30, and faces the display area SG10 of the staging display device SG. Further, a motor YK17 is provided on the back side of the movable accessory. Further, a plurality of countersunk screws YK22 for fixing various members of the movable accessory are used for the back surface portion YK40 corresponding to the movable base portion YK10 and the back surface portion YK40 corresponding to the logo accessory YK12.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above in FIG. 60, when the logo accessory YK12 is operated (initial operation after the power is turned on or when the accessory effect is executed), the effect display device SG is displayed. It is configured to have a timing located in front of the region SG10. When the logo accessory YK12 is located in front of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, the player cannot visually recognize the display area SG10 located behind the logo accessory YK12. Further, the light emitted by the game effect lamp D26 or the like may be reflected on the back surface portion YK40 and reflected on the effect display device SG.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the back side surface portion YK40 is the color of the display area SG10 (the player is from the front) in a situation where the effect display device SG is not displaying (such as a situation where power is not supplied to the gaming machine). It is the same (or substantially the same) color as black, which is the apparent color when visually recognized. Even when the power is supplied to the gaming machine, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG may display black (in such a case, it is said that the black display is executed). It may be called or it may be said that the display is not executed). With this configuration, even when a movable accessory operates in front of the staging display device SG in a situation where the staging display device SG is displaying in black (or is not displaying). It is possible to prevent the movable accessory from being reflected on the effect display device SG, and the light emitted by the game effect lamp D26 is reflected on the back surface portion YK40, thereby reducing the visibility of the display in the display area SG10. It can be made difficult, and it is possible to prevent the player from having stress due to the driving of the movable accessory.

The color of the back surface portion YK40 may be configured as follows.
(1) The color is similar to the color of the display area SG10 (2) The color is similar to or similar to the color of the display area SG10 (3) The color similar to the color of the display area SG10 is more than half of the surface area. (4) A color similar to or similar to the color of the display area SG10 may occupy more than half of the surface area as described above. As described above, among the colors of the back surface portion YK40, the color occupying the largest area (it is premised that the color is composed of a plurality of colors, but when there is only one color, the color of the entire back surface portion YK40 is used. However, it is sufficient if it is as described above.

Although not shown, not only the logo accessory YK12 but also the movable base portion YK10 may be located in front of the display area SG of the staging display device SG, and the back side corresponding to the movable base portion YK10. Since the front surface portion YK40 is also black, the light emitted by the effect display device SG and the game effect lamp D26 is reflected on the back side surface portion YK40 even when the movable accessory is operated, as in the case of the logo accessory YK12. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to reduce the visibility of the display in the display area SG10, and it is possible to prevent the player from having stress due to the driving of the movable accessory.

Further, as described above, when the logo accessory YK12 operates (when the initial operation after the power is turned on or when the accessory effect is executed), the timing is set in front of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. Since it is configured, it is preferable to configure it so that the operating logo accessory YK12 does not come into contact with the display area SG10.

Here, although not shown, the accessory lamp board on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted for lighting the accessory lamp YK21 inside the movable base portion YK10 (so-called single-sided mounting for mounting the electronic component). , Or it may be mounted on both sides), and the accessory lamp board has a connector (may have a plurality of connectors). The accessory lamp substrate is configured so as not to protrude from the back side surface portion YK40, and the accessory lamp YK21 is configured not to protrude from the back side surface portion YK40. With this configuration, even if a problem occurs when the movable accessory operates, the accessory lamp board or connector of the movable accessory will come into contact with the display area SG10 of the staging display device SG. It is possible to prevent the situation, and even if the game machine is being transported for shipping to the game hall, even if it is vibrated, the display area SG10 of the accessory lamp board or connector of the movable accessory and the effect display device SG Can be prevented from coming into contact with each other.

Further, the movable accessory provided in the recent gaming machine is configured to be cantilevered (for example, the configuration supported by one arm provided on the right side of the staging display device SG in front view is referred to as cantilever. In a movable accessory that is composed of cantilever, the movable accessory sways back and forth due to an abnormality in the drive mechanism, and the movable accessory is produced with a lamp board or a connector. Increasingly, the situation where the display device SG comes into contact with the display area SG10 occurs. Here, the above-mentioned configuration can also be applied to a movable accessory configured as a cantilever, that is, the accessory lamp substrate is configured so as not to protrude from the back side surface portion YK40, and the accessory lamp YK21 is configured on the back side surface portion. By configuring it so that it does not protrude from the YK40, even in a movable accessory configured as a cantilever, the situation where the accessory lamp board or connector of the movable accessory and the display area SG10 of the staging display device SG come into contact with each other. Can be prevented. The movable accessory configured by the cantilever may be referred to as a movable accessory supported by the cantilever from one of the left and right sides of the staging display device SG.

Further, the back surface portion YK40 may be configured to be substantially flat. More specifically, the height of the maximum step (sometimes referred to as the length in the height direction) of the back surface portion YK40 may be shorter than the radius of the game ball, or the thickness of the game medal. It may be shorter than (sometimes referred to as a length in the thickness direction), or may be shorter than the distance between the movable accessory and the display area SG10. As an example, the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm.

Further, although not shown, the back side surface portion YK40 is configured not to have transparency, and the accessory lamp board and the connector cannot be visually recognized (or visually recognized) from the outside of the back side surface portion YK40. Difficult).

<Flat screw>
Next, FIG. 66 is an example of a screw used in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. (A) is a countersunk screw YK22, and the countersunk screw YK22 has a flat upper surface and is configured so that the head (screw head of the screw) does not protrude from the ground surface (in FIG. 66, the countersunk screw). The upper surface of the screw YK22 and the ground contact surface are flush with each other, but the upper surface of the countersunk screw YK22 may be lower than the ground contact surface). It is used for the above-mentioned movable accessory, and is configured so as not to protrude from the front surface portion YK30 and the back side surface portion YK40. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the display area SG10 of the display device SG comes into contact with the display area SG10.

<Nabe screw>
Next, FIG. 66 (b) is a pan head screw, and the pan head screw is a screw having a head (screw head of a screw) having a shape similar to the bottom of a pot, and is configured so that the head protrudes from the ground plane. Has been done.

Further, when a screw such as a pan screw having a curved head shape having a small R radius is used for a movable accessory, the light output from the staging display device SG is discolored and reflected by the curved head shape. However, there is a risk that it will be reflected on the staging display device SG. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, by using flat head screws YK22 for all the screws used for the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent the discolored light from being reflected on the effect display device SG.

Further, in order to prevent diffused reflection of light by the screw used for the movable accessory, the countersunk screw YK22 used for the movable accessory may be a screw that has been subjected to black plating such as black chromate plating. Suitable.

Further, all the screws attached to the game board may be countersunk screws YK22, or the countersunk screws YK22 may be configured to have more countersunk screws than pan head screws. The screw BS1 described above in FIG. 47 and the like is also a countersunk screw. As described above, by using a countersunk screw instead of a pan head screw in the area where the game ball can flow down, it can be configured so as not to hinder the flow of the game ball.

<< Configuration of staging display device SG >>
Next, the configuration relating to the effect display device SG applicable to the present specification will be described in detail below. In the embodiments described in detail below, the description thereof will be omitted or simplified by assigning the same reference numerals to the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments. Further, in the present embodiment, a member which has already been described but is not designated in the above-described embodiment is newly designated, but this type of member exists only in the present embodiment. However, it goes without saying that it also exists in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this is not limited to this embodiment, but the same applies to other embodiments.

<Display area SG10>
The display area SG10 of the effect display device SG included in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a TFT (Thin Film Transistor) liquid crystal display. The TFT is a thin film transistor. Further, all the configurations of the liquid crystal display described below are applicable to the display area SG10.

<Structure of TFT liquid crystal display>
First, the outline of the structure of the TFT liquid crystal display will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 67. In FIG. 67, as shown in the figure, it is assumed that the backlight is irradiated from the upper side to the lower side, and the line of sight of the player is directed from the lower side to the upper side.

The role of each component will be described in detail. The polarizing filter can control the light entering and exiting. Next, the glass substrate prevents electricity from leaking. Next, the transparent electrode is an electrode for driving a liquid crystal display, and it is preferable that the transparent electrode is made of a highly transparent material so as not to interfere with the display. Next, the alignment film is a film for arranging the molecules of the liquid crystal layer in a certain direction. Next, the color filter is for displaying colors, and has three color filters of R (red), G (green), and B (blue).

Next, the display mechanism of the TFT liquid crystal display will be described in detail. The light emitted from the backlight passes through a polarizing filter, so that only a part of the light (light having an amplitude component in a specific direction) passes through, and the passed light reaches the liquid crystal layer.

Here, the two alignment films have linear grooves, and the grooves of the two alignment films differ in 90-degree direction. By having the groove, the liquid crystal molecules of the liquid crystal layer are arranged along the groove. Since the grooves of the two alignment films differ in 90 degree direction, when no voltage is applied between the transparent electrodes, the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer are twisted 90 degrees from one alignment film toward the other alignment film. Will be arranged. In this state, when the light emitted from the backlight reaches the liquid crystal layer, the light twists 90 degrees along the gaps where the liquid crystal molecules are lined up and travels, and can pass through the polarizing filter at the tip of the liquid crystal layer. ..

On the other hand, when a voltage is applied between the transparent electrodes, the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer are arranged in a vertical arrangement (along the electric field). In this state, when the light emitted from the backlight reaches the liquid crystal layer, the light travels straight along the gap where the liquid crystal molecules are lined up and cannot pass through the polarizing filter beyond the liquid crystal layer.

The display area SG10 has a configuration that can adjust whether or not light can pass through the polarizing filter depending on whether or not the voltage is applied as described above, corresponding to each of the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B. There is. Since it is configured in this way, for example, the light directed to the color filter R passes through the polarizing filter, and the light directed to the color filter G and the color filter B does not pass through the polarizing filter, whereby the color filter R and the color are used. The liquid crystal display corresponding to the filter G and the color filter B is displayed in red, the light directed to the color filter G passes through the polarizing filter, and the light directed to the color filter R and the color filter B passes through the polarizing filter. By not doing so, the liquid crystal display corresponding to the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B will be displayed in green, and the light directed to the color filter B will pass through the polarizing filter, and the color filter R and the color filter G will be displayed. By preventing the light directed toward the color from passing through the polarizing filter, the liquid crystal display corresponding to the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B is displayed in blue.

Further, as an example, the light directed to the color filter R and the color filter B passes through the polarizing filter, and the light directed to the color filter G does not pass through the polarizing filter, whereby the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B are passed. The liquid crystal display corresponding to the above will be displayed in purple, which is a mixture of red and blue.

In this way, various colors can be displayed on the liquid crystal display by combining the passage of light through the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B. Such a combination of the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B may be referred to as one pixel or one pixel. The combination of the three filters of the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B may be one pixel (1 pixel), or a predetermined combination of the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B (filter). (Combination of the number and arrangement of the above) may be one pixel (one pixel).

Further, by passing the light directed to the color filter R and the color filter B to display purple, and in the color filter in the vicinity of the color filter, the light directed to the color filter R is passed to display red. In appearance, purple and red are mixed, and it is possible to express a color in which red is stronger than purple. By increasing the number of filters per pixel (1 pixel) in this way, it is possible to express a wider variety of display colors.

As described above, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG in the present embodiment is a TFT liquid crystal display, and has a predetermined number (for example, 10 million) of the above-mentioned pixels (pixels are arranged in a predetermined number). Has been).

Further, the color displayed on the liquid crystal display corresponding to one pixel can be expressed as the brightness of red, green, and blue. In other words, it can be expressed by how much each element of red, green, and blue is included. For example, the brightness of red, green, and blue can be expressed as 256 levels from 0 to 255, respectively. As specific examples, (255,0,0) is red, (0,255,0) is green, (0,0,255) is blue, (0,0,0) is black, and (255,255). 255) becomes white. That is, it can be represented in the order of R, G, B from the left. As described above, the color displayed when each element of R, G, and B is the minimum is black, and the color displayed when each element of R, G, and B is the minimum is white. When expressing a color displayed on a liquid crystal display such as (0, 0, 0), the leftmost number is the value of R, the value corresponding to R, the value corresponding to red, and the color filter R. The second number from the left may be referred to as the value of G, the value corresponding to G, the value corresponding to green, the value corresponding to the color filter G, etc. The number on the right may be referred to as a value of B, a value corresponding to B, a value corresponding to blue color, a value corresponding to color filter B, and the like. Further, as in (255, 0, 0), the brightness of red, green, and blue expressed as 256 levels from 0 to 255, respectively, may be referred to as an RGB gradation value.

<Standby demo screen>
Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a standby demo screen on the effect display device SG. The standby demo screen is a moving image that notifies the player that the symbol change is not being executed (the game is not in progress), and by displaying the standby demo screen, the stand is vacant. It is possible to notify new game machines that can be played, which can contribute to the improvement of the operating rate. The standby demo screen may be referred to as a standby demo, a standby demo effect, a standby demo display, a demo screen, a demo effect, a demo display, and the like. The situation in which the standby demo screen is displayed may be referred to as a standby state, and the situation in which the main game symbol is fluctuating may be referred to as a game in progress state.

In addition, after the lost symbol has stopped and there is no hold, the standby demo screen will be displayed when the state in which no new symbol change is executed and no new hold occurs continues for a predetermined time. It will be displayed. If the big hit symbol (or small hit symbol) is stopped, the demo screen will not be displayed after that even if there is no hold, and the big hit will start executing (or the small hit will start executing). Will be. In addition, if the lost symbol is stopped and there is a hold, a new symbol fluctuation will start after the fixed fluctuation time elapses, while the big hit symbol (or small hit symbol) will stop. In addition, if there is a hold, the big hit will be started (or the small hit will be started) after the variable fixed time elapses.

<Standby demo screen display image>
Next, FIG. 68 is a standby screen display image. The figure shows an example of a case where a standby demo screen is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

Further, in the figure (a), the main game symbol is being changed, and the decorative symbol is changedly displayed in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. A background image or the like is also displayed in the display area SG10, and various colors are used in the display area SG10. As described above, the display area SG10 is a TFT liquid crystal display.

Next, in FIG. 3B, the variation of the main game symbol ends, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. In addition, the background image is continuously displayed. Since there is no hold, the timer measurement related to the display of the standby demo screen starts from the timing shown in FIG. 3B.

Next, from the timing of FIG. 3B, a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) related to the standby demo screen has elapsed without a new hold occurring (a timer value related to the display of the standby demo screen measures the predetermined time). As a result, the standby demo screen is started to be displayed on the effect display device SG in the figure (c). In the present embodiment, the standby demo screen is configured to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of the main game symbol, but another screen may be displayed before the display of the standby demo screen is started. good. As an example, when 60 seconds have passed from the state in which the main game symbol is stopped and the hold has not occurred to the state in which the hold has not newly occurred, the first standby state is set. In the first standby state, an image in which the decorative symbol pattern (for example, a character image attached to the decorative symbol) shakes, an image related to volume adjustment, an image related to light intensity adjustment, etc. are displayed in the display area SG10. Will be done. When 120 seconds (180 seconds from the stop of the main game symbol) have elapsed from the first standby state, the second standby state is set. In the second standby state, the standby demo screen is displayed and the decorative symbol is hidden (the reserved image is also hidden).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 68, the standby demo screen is displayed and the decorative symbol is hidden in FIG. 68 (c) (the reserved image is also hidden). Further, various colors are used in the display area SG10. After that, in the figure (d), all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed only in black, and then, in the figure (e), a moving image different from the figure (c) is displayed. Will be. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a timing in which all the areas of the display area SG10 are only black while the standby demo screen is being displayed. It should be noted that the fact that all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed only in black (only black) means that all the areas of the display area SG10 are hidden and all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed off. There is.

After that, in the figure (f), all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed only in white. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a timing in which all the areas of the display area SG10 are only white while the standby demo screen is being displayed. In FIG. 68, the standby demo screen is shown in FIGS. (c) to (f), and the standby demo screen continues to be displayed even after the figure (f). Although not shown, the display of the standby demo screen is configured so that a moving image of a specific time (for example, 30 seconds) loops. As an example, “(c) → (d)” in FIG. → (e) → (f) → (c) → (d) → ... ”will be displayed. In this case, "(c)-> (d)-> (e)-> (f) may be referred to as one cycle of the standby demo screen.

In the drawings (a), (b), (c), and (e), since various colors are used in the display area SG10, the pixels included in the effect display device SG include the color filter R and the color. Some pixels allow light to pass through all of the filter G and color filter B, some pixels do not allow light to pass through all of the color filter R, color filter G, and color filter B, and some pixels allow light to pass through. Color filter R and color filter G. It is configured so that there are pixels through which light passes only through a part of the color filters of the color filter B and the color filter B. In other words, when expressed as red, green, and blue brightness, some pixels are displayed at (0,0,0), and some pixels are displayed at (255,255,255). Some pixels are displayed as 120, 0, 90) or the like.

In the present embodiment, one pixel in the effect display device SG has a plurality of color filters R, color filters G, and color filters B, respectively, and pixels through which light passes only through some of the color filters. The term includes a case where light does not pass through all of one type of color filter such as light does not pass through all of a plurality of color filters R, and light passes through a part of a plurality of color filters R. The part includes a case where light passes through only a part of one type of color filter such that light does not pass through.

Further, in FIG. 3D, since all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed only in black, the pixels of the effect display device SG include the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B. It is configured so that only the pixels that light does not pass through all of the above. In other words, when expressed as the brightness of red, green, and blue, it is configured so that only the pixels displayed at (0, 0, 0) are displayed. With this configuration, the manager of the game hall displays the standby demo screen without executing the game, and confirms a defect (mainly the presence or absence of a bright spot) in the display area SG10 of the staging display device SG. This makes it possible to easily manage the effect display device SG even in a game hall where a plurality of game machines are installed. The bright spot is a pixel that has a problem that it is always displayed in a predetermined color (white) or the like. In the figure (d), the value corresponding to red in all pixels is 0, the value corresponding to green in all pixels is 0, and the value corresponding to blue in all pixels is 0. It has become.

Further, as described above, the color of the back surface portion YK40 is configured to be the same color as black when all the areas (pixels) of the display area SG10 are displayed at (0,0,0). You may.

Further, in the figure (f), since all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed only in white, the pixels of the effect display device SG include the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B. It is configured so that all of the pixels have only pixels through which light passes. In other words, when expressed as the brightness of red, green, and blue, it is configured so that only the pixels displayed in (255, 255, 255) are displayed. With this configuration, the manager of the amusement park displays the standby demo screen without executing the game, and confirms the defect (mainly the presence or absence of a dead point) in the display area SG10 of the staging display device SG. This makes it possible to easily manage the effect display device SG even in a game hall where a plurality of game machines are installed. The dead point is a pixel that has a problem that it is always displayed in black (it is hidden). In the figure (f), the value corresponding to red in all the pixels is 1 or more, the value corresponding to green in all the pixels is 1 or more, and the value corresponding to blue in all the pixels is 1. It is 1 or more. In the figure, the value corresponding to red in all pixels is 1 or more, the value corresponding to green in all pixels is 1 or more, and the value corresponding to blue in all pixels is 1 or more. As an example of a certain situation, the case where the display area SG10 is displayed in black is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the standby demo screen is displayed in a color other than black, and all pixels correspond to green. It may be configured to have a situation in which the value to be used is 1 or more and the value corresponding to blue color is 1 or more in all the pixels.

As described above, in the standby demo screen in the present embodiment, the timing in which all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed only in black and the timing in which all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed in white only. Is configured to have. With this configuration, the manager of the amusement park displays the standby demo screen without executing the game, and confirms the defect (mainly the presence or absence of a dead point) in the display area SG10 of the staging display device SG. This makes it possible to easily manage the effect display device SG even in a game hall where a plurality of game machines are installed.

The display area SG10 of the effect display device SG in the present embodiment may be configured as follows while the standby demo screen is being displayed.
(1) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing in which only pixels through which light does not pass through all of the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B are formed.
(2) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, when expressed as red, green, and blue brightness, it has a timing in which only the pixels displayed at (0, 0, 0) are displayed.
(3) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, the value corresponding to red in all pixels is 0, the value corresponding to green in all pixels is 0, and the value corresponding to blue in all pixels is 0. It has the timing to become.
(4) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to red becomes 0 in all the pixels.
(5) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to green becomes 0 in all the pixels.
(6) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to blue becomes 0 in all the pixels.
(7) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing in which only the pixels through which light does not pass through all the color filters R are available.
(8) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing in which only the pixels through which light does not pass through all the color filters G are available.
(9) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing in which only the pixels through which light does not pass through all the color filters B are formed.
(10) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing in which only the pixels through which light passes through all of the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B are available.
(11) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, when expressed as red, green, and blue brightness, it has a timing in which only the pixels displayed in (255, 255, 255) are displayed.
(12) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to red is 1 or more in all the pixels.
(13) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to green is 1 or more in all the pixels.
(14) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to blue color becomes 1 or more in all the pixels.
(15) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing in which only the pixels through which light passes through all the color filters R are available.
(16) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing in which only the pixels through which light passes through all the color filters G are available.
(17) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing in which only the pixels through which light passes through all the color filters B are available.

The above configurations (1) to (17) are the configurations while the standby demo screen is being displayed, but the above configurations (1) to (17) can be applied to other situations. As an example, the above configurations (1) to (17) may be applied to an effect during execution of a predetermined big hit, an effect during execution of a predetermined small hit, an effect during execution of a predetermined reach effect, and the like. Further, the standby demo screens may be configured to have a plurality of types, and in such a configuration, the configurations (1) to (17) may be applied only to the predetermined standby demo screens.

<< Configuration of top surface >>
Next, the configuration of the upper surface of the pachinko gaming machine applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below. In the embodiments described in detail below, the description thereof will be omitted or simplified by assigning the same reference numerals to the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments. Further, in the present embodiment, a member which has already been described but is not designated in the above-described embodiment is newly designated, but this type of member exists only in the present embodiment. However, it goes without saying that it also exists in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this is not limited to this embodiment, but the same applies to other embodiments.

<Front view of pachinko gaming machine>
First, FIG. 69 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine applicable to the present specification. Since the pachinko gaming machine according to FIG. 69 has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine according to FIG. 1, the description of the above-described configuration will be omitted.

First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has an upper surface portion D50 which is an upper surface side of the outer frame D12 and the front frame D14. The configuration of the upper surface portion D50 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

<Perspective view of the upper surface portion D50>
Next, FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the upper surface portion D50 of the pachinko gaming machine applicable to the present specification. As shown in the figure, the upper right direction in the figure is the back direction seen from the player, the lower left direction in the figure is the front direction seen from the player, and the lower right direction in the figure is the right seen from the player. It is the direction, and the upper left direction in the figure is the left direction as seen from the player.

As shown in the figure, the upper surface portion D50 is composed of an outer frame D12 and a front frame D14. The front frame upper surface D52 is the upper surface of the front frame D14, and the outer frame upper surface D53 is the upper surface of the outer frame D12. In the upper surface portion D50, the outer frame D12 and the front frame D14 have a step, and the front surface of the outer frame D12 which is the step is referred to as a step surface D51. The stepped surface D51 may be referred to as a stepped portion, the outer frame D12 may be referred to as a base portion, and the front frame D14 may be referred to as a door portion.

The stepped surface D51 may be the front surface of the outer frame D12 at the protruding portion of the outer frame D12 that protrudes upward with respect to the front frame D14 in the front view. Further, the stepped surface D51 may be a portion of the front surface of the outer frame D12 higher than the front frame upper surface D52. Further, the stepped surface D51 may be a portion of the upper portion of the front surface of the outer frame D12 that is not in contact with (or close to) the back surface of the front frame D14.

<Side view of top surface D50>
Next, FIG. 71 is a side view of the upper surface portion D50 of the pachinko gaming machine applicable to the present specification. As shown in the figure, the right direction in the figure is the back direction seen from the player, the left direction in the figure is the front direction seen from the player, and the upper direction in the figure is the upward direction seen from the player. The downward direction in the figure is the downward direction as seen by the player. The upward direction and the downward direction may be referred to as a vertical direction.

As shown in the figure, the front frame upper surface D52 is inclined downward (downwardly inclined) from the front to the back when viewed from the player. Since it is configured in this way, as shown in the figure, even when the game ball is placed so as to be in contact with the stepped surface D51, the game ball does not roll toward the front. Even if the game ball is placed on the upper surface D52 of the front frame, it can be configured so as not to fall toward the player. It should be noted that, as long as it is on the upper surface D52 of the front frame, it is configured to roll in the direction of the outer frame D12 no matter where the game ball is placed.

The configuration detailed in FIGS. 70 and 71 is a configuration in which the gaming machine is installed in the game hall. For example, when the gaming machine is installed on a horizontal surface, the front frame upper surface D52 is a player. It may be configured so as to face downward from the back to the front when viewed from the back, or it may be configured horizontally. In such a configuration, when it is installed in the amusement park, it is installed at an angle from the front to the back when viewed from the player.

Further, in the lower right part of the figure, a configuration in which the step surface D51 and the periphery of the game ball are enlarged is shown. As shown in the figure, when the height of the stepped surface D51 (the height in the vertical direction and may be referred to as the length in the height direction) is A and the radius of the game ball is B, A <B. It has become. That is, the length of the step surface D51 in the height direction is configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball. With this configuration, if the gaming ball is placed on the upper surface D52 of the front frame while the gaming machine is being transported for shipping to the gaming field, the gaming machine may be affected by another gaming machine, a wall surface, or the like. Even when pressure is applied to the game ball in the back direction, the game ball rides on the upper surface D53 of the outer frame, and it is possible to prevent the outer frame D12 from being pressed by the game ball.

Although not shown, the height (length in the height direction) A of the stepped surface D51 is longer than the thickness (length in the thickness direction) of the game medal used in a rotating cylinder type gaming machine or the like. It is configured as follows. The thickness of the game medal in this case may be the thickness of the game medal of φ25 or the thickness of the game medal of φ30. As an example, the thickness of the φ25 game medal is about 1.6 mm, and the thickness of the φ30 game medal is about 1.7 mm. With this configuration, even if a game medal is placed on the upper surface D52 of the front frame in a game field where a pachinko machine and a spinning machine are installed, it will not fall toward the player. Can be configured as follows. In addition, a ball tank or the like is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine to allow the game balls that have flowed into the out port to flow down. There is a risk that a problem will occur. According to this configuration, even if the game medal is placed on the upper surface D52 of the front frame, the game medal will not ride on the upper surface D53 of the outer frame, and the game medal will fall to the back side of the game machine. Can be prevented.

<< Example of changing the configuration of the upper surface portion D50 >>
Next, an example of modification of the upper surface portion D50 applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

<Perspective view of the upper surface portion D50>
Next, FIG. 72 is a perspective view of a modified example of the upper surface portion D50 of the pachinko gaming machine applicable to the present specification. As shown in the figure, the upper right direction in the figure is the back direction seen from the player, the lower left direction in the figure is the front direction seen from the player, and the lower right direction in the figure is the right seen from the player. It is the direction, and the upper left direction in the figure is the left direction as seen from the player.

As shown in the figure, the upper surface portion D50 is composed of an outer frame D12 and a front frame D14. The front frame upper surface D52 is the upper surface of the front frame D14, and the outer frame upper surface D53 is the upper surface of the outer frame D12. In the upper surface portion D50, the outer frame D12 and the front frame D14 have a step, and the front surface of the outer frame D12 which is the step is referred to as a step surface D51. Further, the upper surface portion D50 has a groove portion D54 (on the front frame upper surface D52) on the front frame D14 side.

<Side view of top surface D50>
Next, FIG. 73 is a side view of a modified example of the upper surface portion D50 of the pachinko gaming machine applicable to the present specification. As shown in the figure, the right direction in the figure is the back direction seen from the player, the left direction in the figure is the front direction seen from the player, and the upper direction in the figure is the upward direction seen from the player. The downward direction in the figure is the downward direction as seen by the player. The upward direction and the downward direction may be referred to as a vertical direction. Further, the surface that becomes the bottom of the groove portion D54 is referred to as a groove portion bottom surface D55, and the side surface of the groove portion D54 is referred to as a groove portion side surface D56.

As shown in the figure, the front frame upper surface D52 is inclined downward (downwardly inclined) from the front to the back when viewed from the player. Further, as shown in the figure, the game ball is configured to be held in the groove D54. That is, when the game ball is placed in the front direction from the groove portion D54 on the front frame upper surface D52, the game ball does not roll in the front direction but rolls in the back direction and is held by the groove portion D54. It is configured to go beyond the groove D54 and come into contact with the stepped surface D51 to stop. With this configuration, even if the game ball is placed on the upper surface D52 of the front frame, it can be configured so as not to fall toward the player. Further, in the gaming ball placed in contact with the stepped surface D51, even when the gaming machine is tilted toward the player, it is configured to be held by the groove D54, so that the gaming ball can be held toward the player. It can be prevented from falling.

Further, in the lower right part of the figure, a configuration in which the groove portion D54 and the periphery of the game ball are enlarged is shown. As shown in the figure, the game ball is held in the groove D54, the height (length in the height direction) perpendicular to the groove bottom surface D55 in the groove D54 is A, and the radius of the game ball is B. In some cases, A <B. That is, the height (length in the height direction) in the direction perpendicular to the groove bottom surface D55 of the groove D54 is configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball. Further, when the height of the groove side surface D56 in the groove D54 (height in the vertical direction of the groove D54) is C and the radius of the game ball is B, C <B. That is, the height of the groove D54 in the vertical direction (length in the height direction) is configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball. With this configuration, if the gaming ball is held in the groove D54 while the gaming machine is being transported for shipping to the gaming field, the gaming ball may be held by another gaming machine, a wall surface, or the like. Even when pressure is applied in the back direction, the gaming ball rides on the upper surface D53 of the outer frame from the groove D54, and the gaming ball can be configured so that the pressure is not applied to the groove D54.

In the modified example of the upper surface portion D50 of the pachinko gaming machine applicable to the present specification, which is described in detail in FIGS. 72 and 73, the upper surface portion D52 of the front frame does not have an inclination and is horizontal. It may be configured, or it may be configured so as to be inclined downward from the back to the front when viewed from the player. Even in such a configuration, the game ball can be held in the groove portion D54 as in the above-described configuration.

The configuration detailed in FIGS. 72 and 73 is a configuration in which the gaming machine is installed in the game hall. For example, when the gaming machine is installed on a horizontal surface, the front frame upper surface D52 is a player. It may be configured so as to face downward from the back to the front when viewed from the back, or it may be configured horizontally. In such a configuration, when it is installed in the amusement park, it is installed at an angle from the front to the back when viewed from the player.

It should be noted that the stepped portion may be configured to be provided in a portion other than the upper surface portion D50, and for example, the stepped portion is also provided between the outer frame D12 and the inner frame D16 in the lower part of the gaming machine in FIG. It may be configured as follows. The step portion may be provided on the outer frame D12 side (the outer frame D12 may protrude toward the front side when viewed from the player), or may be provided on the inner frame D16 side (inner frame D16). May protrude toward you when viewed from the player). Further, the height of the step portion (height in the front side direction when viewed from the player) may be configured to be less than the radius of the game ball.

<< Configuration related to immersive prevention display >>
Next, as a configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification, a configuration for displaying a squeeze prevention display will be described in detail below. In the embodiments described in detail below, the description thereof will be omitted or simplified by assigning the same reference numerals to the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments. Further, in the present embodiment, a member which has already been described but is not designated in the above-described embodiment is newly designated, but this type of member exists only in the present embodiment. However, it goes without saying that it also exists in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this is not limited to this embodiment, but the same applies to other embodiments.

In the following, as an example, a configuration for displaying a warning image (a squeeze prevention display) on a staging display device in a spinning machine will be described in detail, but a configuration for displaying a warning image on the staging display device is described in the present specification. It should be added that it is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine related to the book.

In pachinko machines, as a conventional measure against immersiveness (a measure to reduce the number of players who play games beyond their own resources), a warning is given while the standby demo screen is displayed. However, most of the players who are watching the standby demo screen displayed on the effect display device S40 (in the pachinko gaming machine, the effect display device SG) during the standby demo period are already absorbed in it (beyond their own resources). Since he is not a player (who is playing a game) but a player who is about to start a game, he cannot exert the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness, and a game in which he plays a game beyond his own resources. The number of people did not decrease.

Enthusiasm is thought to occur as a result of the player's inability to make calm decisions. The following timings can be mentioned as the timings at which it is highly likely that a calm judgment cannot be made.

(1) Timing such as the end of the AT state When the AT state is in the AT state, many game medals may be awarded, so that the player cannot be discriminated and a calm judgment cannot be made. It can be said that the sex is high. In addition, it is easy to expect that the AT state is hidden (maybe the AT lottery has been won), and it is highly possible that a calm judgment cannot be made. Further, when the AT in progress state ends, the total number of game medals awarded in the AT in progress state is displayed on the effect display device S40. At that time, if the number of game medals awarded during AT is smaller than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used to play the game up to that point, it will be recovered (let's win the AT lottery). It is easy to fall into feelings, and it is highly possible that calmness cannot be judged. This phenomenon occurs not only when the AT in-progress state actually ends, but also when the AT counter value becomes 0, when the push order navigation ends, or when the AT in-progress state does not actually end. Although it is a state, it also occurs when a screen suggesting that the AT-during state is terminated by the control of the sub-control board S is displayed on the effect display device S40.

(2) Timing at which the bonus game ends Since many game medals may be awarded during the bonus game, it is highly likely that the player will not be able to distinguish and make a calm judgment. Also, if the number of times the bonus role is won between the start of the game and that point is large, it is easy to expect that the setting is high (for example, the setting value is 5 or more), and a calm judgment can be made. It can be said that there is a high possibility that it will not be possible. Further, at the end of the bonus game, the total number of game medals given during the bonus game is displayed on the effect display device S40. At that time, if the number of game medals given during the bonus game is smaller than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money spent from the start of the game to that point, let's get it back (let's win the bonus role). It can be said that there is a high possibility that calmness cannot be judged.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a game advantageous to a player who can be awarded many game medals such as an AT state or a bonus game (hereinafter, a game advantageous to the player may be referred to as an advantageous game) ends. Attention was given at the timing. In the following, the advantageous game may mean either a bonus game or an AT state, or may mean both a bonus game and an AT state.

Next, FIG. 74 shows an image for calling attention with the end screen of the bonus game displayed on the effect display device S40 and the end screen of the AT in progress state at the end of the advantageous game (hereinafter, “attention image””. It is an example of). The end screen is an image showing at least the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) and the background (...) given during the advantageous game. Even if the image showing the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) given during the advantageous game is displayed as an image different from the image showing the background (hereinafter, may be referred to as "background image"). good. In addition, the caution image is an image displayed on the staging display device S40 to prevent the above-mentioned squeezing, and is an image clearly stating "Be careful of squeezing. Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately." Is.

Since the "attention-calling image" is an image for calling attention to the player, it is preferable to display it on the effect display device S40 with priority over the game screen. That is, it is preferable to display the image so as to be in the foreground rather than the screen for the effect. For example, when displaying various images on the effect display device S40 by superimposing a plurality of graphic layers, the front surface (the foreground). ) Is displayed in the "Caution image" on the graphic layer. Specifically, the front graphic layer is displayed in the "attention image", and the push order navigation effect is displayed in the graphic layer on the back side of the "attention image" graphic layer, and the background image. It is preferable to configure the display so that it is displayed on the graphic layer on the back side of the graphic layer of the push order navigation effect. By doing so, the "attention image" will always be displayed on the front side facing the player, and will be displayed without being disturbed by the screen for staging, and the "attention image" will be displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the size of the display area of the alert image to be displayed on the effect display device S40 at the end of the advantageous game will be described. If the display area of the attention-calling image is too small, it is difficult for the player to recognize it, so that the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited. On the other hand, if the display area is too large, it may hinder the visual recognition of other images in the staging display device S40. In other words, the alert image may cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the size of the display area of the effect display device S40 for displaying the attention image is less than 7 inches (in other words, in the case of a small effect display device), the attention image is displayed. It is preferable that the size is 10,000 mm or more in the vertical direction and 64,12 mm in the horizontal direction. Further, when the size of the display area of the effect display device S40 for displaying the attention image is 7 inches or more (in other words, in the case of the large effect display device S40), the size of the attention image is vertically increased. Is 30,000 mm and the width is 192,37 mm.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the timing of displaying the end screen and the alert image on the effect display device S40 will be described. Both (a) and (b) in FIG. 76 exemplify the final game of the advantageous game, and when a game medal is awarded in the final game of the advantageous game (when a small winning combination is won), the number of credits. After adding the numbers or paying out the game medals, both the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the effect display device S40 (FIG. 76 (a)). In addition, when a game medal is not awarded in the final game of the advantageous game (for example, when a replay combination is won), the end screen and attention are given to the effect display device S40 after the rotation of all reels M50 in the final game of the advantageous game is stopped. Both the arousal image and the arousal image are displayed (FIG. 76 (b)).

Next, the timing for hiding the end screen in the effect display device S40 will be described. One of the reasons for displaying the end screen is to notify the player of the total number of game medals awarded during the advantageous game. That is, if the player has displayed the end screen for a sufficient time to recognize the total number of game medals awarded during the advantageous game, it is okay to hide the end screen, so the end screen is hidden. The timing may be the operation timing of the start lever D50 related to the next game of the final game, the game medal insertion timing related to the next game of the final game, the bet button operation timing related to the next game of the collection game, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start lever D50 is operated, the effect display device S40 displays the effect screen according to the game situation at that time. For example, if the cherry, which is one of the small roles, is won when the AT state ends and the game section becomes the normal section, the cherry role as shown in FIG. 77 (a) is won. It is possible to display an effect screen that suggests. Further, after the end of the bonus game, if the player shifts to the AT preparation state 1 and wins the push order bell role, which is one of the small roles, the stop buttons are operated in any order as shown in FIG. 77 (b). A push order image (hereinafter, also referred to as "push order navigation effect" or "push order navigation display") indicating whether or not to be performed and an effect screen of the AT preparation state 1 can be displayed (the same applies to the AT preparation state 2).

Next, the time for continuing to display the alert image will be described. If the time for displaying the alert image is too short, the player cannot sufficiently recognize the alert image and cannot exert the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness. In addition, even if the attention-calling image can be recognized, the expected effect cannot be exhibited as a countermeasure against immersiveness without paying much attention. On the other hand, if the time for displaying the alert image is too long, it may interfere with the visual recognition of other images. In other words, it may be offensive to the player by being distracted by the game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the attention-calling image is continuously displayed only for a time that can exert the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness (make the player aware that he / she is enthusiastic) and does not cause discomfort to the player. I have to. The time appropriate for continuing to display the alert image will be explained step by step below.

First, with reference to FIG. 78, the time spent when the player plays the game in the shortest time will be described. After the start lever D50 is operated, the time spent from the start of rotation of the reel M50 until the rotation speed of the reel M50 becomes constant is about 180 ms. In addition, the time spent from the operation of the stop button to the stop of rotation of the reel M50 is 190 ms at the maximum (Article 6 of the Regulations Concerning Approval of Gaming Machines and Examination of Types, etc. (Standards) are specified in Attached Table 5 (1) a (g)). Further, the time spent adding the granted game medals as the number of credits or the time actually spent paying out the game medals is about 40 ms per card. That is, although the time spent when the player plays the game in the shortest time varies depending on the number of game medals to be given, even if the specifications are such that a plurality of stop buttons cannot be operated at the same time (multiple reels M50 cannot be stopped and controlled at the same time). For example, it is about 750 ms to about 1070 ms (when the number of game medals awarded is 0 to 8), and if the specifications are such that multiple stop buttons can be operated at the same time (multiple reels M50 can be stopped and controlled at the same time), about 370 ms or more. It can be said that it is about 690 ms (when the number of game medals awarded is 0 to 8).

Even if the player plays the game in the shortest time, one game is played in less than the minimum game time (the minimum time required for one game as described above in the present embodiment is 4100 ms or more). It cannot be finished. This is an interpretation of Appendix 5 (1) Li (a) and its technical standards shown in Article 6 (Technical Standards for Game Machine Types) of the Regulations Concerning Certification of Pachinko Machines and Examination of Types, etc. It is stipulated in the standard. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, even when the previous game is played in the shortest time and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated immediately after the end of the previous game, this time. The rotation of the reel M50 related to the game is started after 4100 ms has elapsed from the start of the rotation of the reel M50 related to the previous game, so that one game is completed in less than the minimum game time. It is designed so that it will not be lost.

In general, in the BB game, which is one of the bonus games, a small winning combination that does not require a push (a small winning combination that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button) is won with a high probability (even if it is a specification that always wins). good). Further, in the AT state, the push order bell (any of the above-mentioned prize-A1 to prize-A6) and the push order re-game (the above-mentioned re-game-D1 to the above-mentioned) in which the stop buttons need to be operated in a specific order are required. When D3, re-game-E1 to E3, re-game-F1 to F3) are won, the order in which the operations should be performed is notified. Further, during the bonus game or AT, the player feels a sense of accomplishment. Therefore, at least during an advantageous game such as during a bonus game or during an AT (a game state that is relatively advantageous for the player), the game progresses in a relatively short time as compared with the case where many players are not in the advantageous game. are doing.

As described above, even if the player plays the game in the shortest time, one game cannot be completed in less than the minimum game time. That is, as shown in FIG. 80, when the final game of the advantageous game is played in the shortest time, even if the start lever D50 is operated immediately, there is a certain amount of time before the reel M50 starts rotating. Further, even if the rotation of the reel M50 starts, there is a certain amount of time before the rotation speed of the reel M50 becomes constant. Since any operation by the player is invalid during these times, the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the alert image is continuously displayed, but the alert image is displayed even after these times. If it continues to be displayed, it may cause discomfort to the player. This is because, after these times, at least the operation of the stop button becomes effective, but the suggestion that the cherry role has been won as shown in FIG. 77 (a) and the warning image overlap, so that the stop button is activated. You shouldn't operate the stop button D40 because you can't operate the D40 (because the player can't see which role to aim for) or the alert image is displayed on the foreground graphic layer. This is because there is a feeling of anxiety about whether or not it is there. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable that the time for continuing to display the alert image does not exceed these times.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the appropriate time for continuously displaying the attention-calling image is set to 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. In addition, it is thought that the reason why it is set to 3000 ms or more is that the longer the time that the attention-calling image is displayed, the more firmly the player recognizes the attention-calling by the warning image, and the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness can be exhibited. Because it is possible.

As shown in FIG. 81, it seems that there are a few players who play the game over time without playing in the shortest time during the advantageous game. In that case, if the alert image is continuously displayed for 3210 ms, at least the operation of the stop button related to the game after the advantageous game is completed becomes effective while the alert image is displayed, which may cause discomfort to the player. .. However, it is highly likely that a player who spends a lot of time playing a game even during an advantageous game does not feel uncomfortable as a player who plays a game in the shortest time. By the way, if the game is played in the shortest time after the attention-calling image is hidden, one game can be completed before the minimum game time elapses. Therefore, although it is possible to end one game before the minimum game time has elapsed, the warning image has been displayed continuously, so that one game has been performed before the minimum game time has elapsed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel dissatisfaction such as not being able to finish the game (loss).

Next, the position where the attention-calling image is displayed on the effect display device S40 will be described. Basically, it is preferable that the display is in a position that is easy for the player to recognize. One of the positions easily recognized by the player is a position above the center of the housing. This is because the player's eye height is above the center of the housing.

In the present embodiment, the effect display device S40 is positioned above the center of the housing (when viewed from the player) as shown in FIG. 1 of the present embodiment, and the effect display device S40 is positioned as shown in FIG. 74. A warning image is displayed above the center. Of course, if the effect display device S40 is provided above the center of the housing, the effect display device S40 is above the center, above the right corner (when viewed from the player), and above the center (game). Be careful of the lower right corner from the center (when viewed from the player), the lower right corner from the center (when viewed from the player), and the lower left corner from the center (when viewed from the player). An arousal image may be displayed. That is, the display position of the attention-calling image in the effect display device S40 may be appropriately determined so that the player can accurately visually recognize the attention-calling image according to the position where the effect display device S40 is arranged.

Further, it is preferable to determine the position where the attention-calling image is displayed in the effect display device S40 in consideration of the position where the image other than the attention-calling image is displayed. For example, it is preferable to display a warning image at a position that does not overlap with the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) given during the advantageous game or the suggestion that the cherry role has been won. .. Further, in the push order navigation effect, it is preferable to display a warning image at a position where it does not overlap as much as possible. As described above, it is preferable to display the "attention image" on the frontmost graphic layer, but in the case of a configuration in which the "attention image" is displayed on the graphic layer for displaying the image for staging, it is preferable. It is preferable to display it at a position that does not overlap with the push order navigation effect. In addition, even if the configuration is such that it is displayed in the "attention image" on the frontmost graphic layer, when it is assumed that the timing of the push order navigation effect and the timing of displaying it in the "attention image" overlap. It is preferable to display a "warning image" at a position that does not overlap with the push order navigation effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the attention is alerted (the alert image is displayed) even while the standby demo screen is being displayed. FIG. 82 shows an example of the standby demo screen displayed by the effect display device S40. As described above, the display of the standby demo screen is displayed when the game has not been executed for a predetermined period.

When the standby demo screen is being displayed, an image showing the manufacturer of the gaming machine is first displayed (FIG. 82 (a)). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, a caution image is displayed (FIG. 82 (b)). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, an image (hereinafter referred to as a demo screen) that introduces the theme and background of the production, including characters and objects appearing in the production of the spinning machine, is displayed in a moving image format. (FIG. 82 (c)). As described above, while the standby demo screen is being displayed, FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) are repeatedly displayed on the effect display device S40.

As mentioned above, most of the players watching the demo screen are not the players who are actually absorbed in it, but the players who are about to start the game. As a countermeasure against immersiveness, it is possible to give an impression to the player who is about to start the game that he / she should not be enthusiastic in advance, but if excessive attention is given, there is a risk that the motivation for the game will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time during which the image for calling attention (warning image) continues to be displayed while the standby demo screen is displayed is the image for calling attention at the end of the advantageous game (warning image). Is shorter than the time it continues to be displayed. In other words, it is less than 3000 ms. Specifically, it is preferably 2000 ms or less at the longest. However, it is not limited to this.

The position and size of the alert image when the alert image is displayed while the standby demo screen is displayed are the same as the position and size when the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game. This is because if the display position is changed depending on the situation, the load on the sub-control board S may increase. Also, if the size is changed depending on the situation, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of images.

The size of the warning image displayed on the effect display device S40 may be larger than the size at the end of the advantageous game during the standby demonstration within a range that does not affect the processing load of the sub-control board S. good. This is because there is a possibility that it is more necessary for the player to be aware of the immersiveness at the end of the advantageous game than during the standby demonstration.

Next, a case where an error occurs in the final game of the advantageous game will be described with reference to FIG. 86. In the present embodiment, even if an error occurs between the operation of the start lever D50 and the stop of rotation of all reels M50, the progress of the game is stopped until the rotation of all reels M50 is stopped. It is designed not to. This is because if the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs between the time when the start lever D50 is operated and the time when the rotation of all the reels M50 is stopped, the player's concentration is lost and the stop button is operated. This is because there is a possibility that an operation error (such as the inability to operate the stop button at an arbitrary timing) is likely to occur. It should be noted that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped.

After that, when the rotation of all the reels M50 is stopped (when the progress of the game is stopped), an error image is displayed on the effect display device S40. This is because if the error image is displayed when an error occurs, the player may make an operation error (such as not being able to operate the stop button at any timing) with a surprised beat. .. After that, when the error is cleared, the progress of the game is restarted (if the game medal is given, the game medal given is added as the number of credits or the game medal is actually paid out), and the effect display device S40 is displayed. An end screen and a warning image are displayed.

It will take some time until the error is cleared, but the alert image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). Of course, even after the operation of the stop button is enabled, the alert image will continue to be displayed, which may cause discomfort to the player. Since there is a slight possibility that the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited, the alert image is configured to continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Also, since it will take some time for the error to be cleared, it may not be unpleasant if the alert image continues to be displayed even after the stop button operation is enabled. Is high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a case where an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game will be described. In the present embodiment, if an error occurs between the end of a certain game and the operation of the start lever D50 related to the next game, the progress of the game is stopped. It should be noted that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, when the progress of the game is stopped due to the occurrence of an error, the effect display device S40 displays the error image on the attention-calling image. By the way, since it is necessary to promptly notify the player, the game clerk, etc. that an error has occurred, the error image is set to have a higher priority than the alert image. As described above, the "attention image" is displayed on the front graphic layer, but the error image is displayed on the front graphic layer and the "attention image" is behind the error image. It can be displayed on the graphic layer on the side. Further, both the "attention image" and the error image may be configured to be displayed on the frontmost graphic layer. After that, when the error is cleared, the progress of the game is restarted (if the game medal is given, the given game medal is added as the number of credits or the game is actually paid out), and the error image is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is hidden.

It will take some time until the error is cleared, but it does not include the time that the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared), and the predetermined time (3000 ms or more). And, 3210 ms or less) keeps displaying the alert image. In addition, the time that was continuously displayed before the error image is displayed (the error occurs) is included, and the alert image is displayed for the remaining time after the error is cleared. Of course, even after the operation of the stop button is enabled, the alert image will continue to be displayed, which may cause discomfort to the player. Since there is a slight possibility that the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited, the alert image is configured to continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Also, since it will take some time for the error to be cleared, it may not be unpleasant if the alert image continues to be displayed even after the stop button operation is enabled. Is high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a case where the power supply is stopped while the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game will be described. In the present embodiment, when the power supply is stopped, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also stopped (paused), and when the power supply is restarted, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also restarted.

Further, when the power supply is stopped, the display on the effect display device S40 is also stopped (hidden), and when the power supply is resumed, the display on the effect display device S40 is resumed. It should be noted that the warning image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) including the time that was continuously displayed before the power supply was stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the caution image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button is enabled, and the player will not be uncomfortable.

When the power supply is resumed, the demo screen may be displayed on the effect display device S40 at all times. There is no problem because the alert image is displayed on the demo screen as well.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, a case where the effect switch is operated in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game medal is given, the game medal to be given is added as the number of credits or is actually paid out until the game medal is inserted (the bet button is operated and inserted from the insertion slot). In the meantime, when the sub input button is operated, the menu screen is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, when the menu screen is displayed on the effect display device S40, items such as password input, QR code display, and payout table can be selected by operating the cross key. Specifically, each item can be selected by operating the cross key and the sub input button.

Even if the sub-input button is operated and the menu screen is displayed, the alert image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). This is because if the attention-calling image is hidden when the menu screen is displayed, the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness may not be exhibited.

However, the position where the alert image is displayed in the situation where the menu screen is displayed is set so that the selected item can be seen (a position that does not interfere with the visibility of the selected item). In other words, as long as the selected item can be understood, it may be displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the position where the attention-calling image is displayed is set so as not to overlap with the QR code displayed when the QR code display is selected as much as possible. This is to prevent the player who is about to finish the game from being unable to finish the game immediately by continuously displaying the alert image.

In the present embodiment, at the end of the advantageous game, a warning image is displayed on the effect display device S40 together with the end screen. However, if the number of game medals awarded during the advantageous game is extremely small, the advantageous game At the end, the attention-calling image may not be displayed on the effect display device S40.

If the number of game medals awarded during the advantageous game is extremely small, the player will not be indistinguishable, and the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used so far will be increased during the advantageous game. Even if the number of game medals is small, it is difficult to get the feeling of getting it back (because it is almost impossible to get it back).

As an example of the case where the number of game medals awarded during the advantageous game is extremely small, there are cases where the number of medals is less than 300 during the AT state and less than 50 during the bonus game.

In the present embodiment, at the end of the advantageous game, the alert image is displayed on the effect display device S40 together with the end screen, but when the end screen is not displayed, the alert image may not be displayed either. .. For example, when the game is played 20 times in a row in the AT state, the effect display device S40 displays a moving image in the 20th game in the AT state. Then, even if the bonus role is won in the 20th game in the AT state, even during the bonus game or at the end of the bonus game, the effect display device S40 wants to continue to display the moving image, so the effect is produced at the end of the bonus game. The display device S40 does not display the end screen. In such a case, the caution image may not be displayed because it hinders the visual recognition of the displayed moving image. However, at the end of the 20th game in the AT state, it is preferable to display the end screen and the attention alert image on the effect display device S40.

In the present embodiment, the size of the attention-calling image is set to the size shown in FIG. May be.

Further, the size of the alert image displayed at the end of the advantageous game may be changed depending on the situation. For example, the size when displayed together with the end screen of the advantageous game and the size when displayed together with the effect screen may be different sizes. For example, since a large number of game medals may have been awarded in the advantageous section, the size of the alert image is displayed at the maximum when the game section returns from the advantageous section to the normal section, or the size of the alert image is larger than other timings. It is preferable to display it for a long time.

In the present embodiment, when a game medal is given, the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the effect display device S40 after the addition as the number of credits or the payout of the game medal, but the rotation of all the reels M50. May be displayed on the effect display device S40 after the stop button is stopped, or may be displayed on the effect display device S40 when the last stop button D40 is released. Further, when the game medal is not given, the end screen and the warning image are displayed on the effect display device S40 after the rotation of all the reels M50 is stopped, but the effect is produced when the last stop button D40 is released. It may be displayed by the display device S40.

In the present embodiment, the end screen and the attention alert image are displayed on the effect display device S40 at the same timing, but the attention alert image may be displayed after the end screen is displayed. Further, a caution image may be displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time after the end screen is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the end screen is hidden when the start lever D50 is operated after the game medal related to the next game is inserted, regardless of whether or not the game medal is given in the final game. When a game medal is awarded in the final game, the end screen is displayed when the game medal related to the next game is inserted (when the bet button D220 is operated or when the game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170). May be hidden.

Further, the alert image may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end screen was displayed. This is because the effect display device S40 displays not only the end screen but also the caution image, so that the player who feels anxiety may not operate the start lever D50.

In the present embodiment, the staging display device S40 is provided above the center of the housing, but the staging display device S40 may be provided near the center of the housing. In that case, if the attention-calling image is displayed in the upper side of the center of the effect display device S40, the upper right corner of the center, the upper left corner of the center, or the center, the image is displayed at a position close to the height of the player's eyes. Become. If only one effect display device S40 is provided, the player's line of sight is gathered there, so a warning image is displayed in the lower right corner from the center, the lower right corner from the center, or the lower left corner from the center. There is no problem.

Further, the staging display device S40 may be provided below the center of the housing due to the influence of the design of the housing or the like. If only one effect display device S40 is provided, the player's line of sight will be gathered there, so that the upper right corner from the center, the upper right corner from the center, the upper left corner from the center, the center, the lower side from the center, and the center. A warning image may be displayed in the lower right corner or the lower left corner below the center.

Further, the position of the alert image displayed at the end of the advantageous game may be changed depending on the situation. For example, the position when the attention alert image is displayed together with the end screen and the position when it is displayed together with the effect screen other than the end screen (for example, the advance notice effect screen) may be different positions.

In the present embodiment, FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) are repeatedly displayed while the standby demo screen is being displayed, but the display order may be changed. For example, FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c) may be repeatedly displayed. The reason why the player sees the demo screen before starting the game is to confirm what the subject matter of the spinning machine that is about to start the game is. When there is a risk that the motivation for playing will be significantly reduced by displaying an image for calling attention before the image introducing the subject matter of the rotating body type gaming machine is displayed as in the present embodiment. , It is preferable to change the order of display. The order of replacement is not limited to this.

In the present embodiment, the time for displaying the alert image while the standby demo screen is displayed is set to less than 3000 ms, but if it is necessary to impress the player who is about to start the game that he / she should not be absorbed in advance. It may be continued to display for 3000 ms or more.

In the present embodiment, the position and size of the alert image displayed during the display of the standby demo screen are the same as the position and size displayed at the end of the advantageous game, but the position and size to be displayed. May be changed depending on the situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 84, when a warning image is always displayed while the standby demo screen is being displayed, it may be displayed smaller in the upper right corner than the center of the effect display device S40. This is a device to prevent excessive attention from being displayed because the attention-calling image will continue to be displayed for a long time. The position and size to be displayed are not limited to this.

In the present embodiment, even if an error occurs between the operation of the start lever D50 and the stop of rotation of all reels M50, the progress of the game is stopped until the rotation of all reels M50 is stopped. However, the progress of the game may not be stopped until the game medal to be awarded is added as the number of credits or actually paid out (except when the game medal is not awarded).

In the present embodiment, if an error occurs between the time when the start lever D50 is operated and the time when the rotation of all the reels M50 is stopped, the error image is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the progress of the game is stopped. However, an error image may be displayed when an error occurs. As a result, the game clerk can rush in, and the error can be cleared immediately after the progress of the game is stopped.

In the present embodiment, if an error occurs between the time when the start lever D50 is operated and the time when the rotation of all reels M50 is stopped, the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped. However, the measurement of the minimum game time may be temporarily stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the caution image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button is enabled, and the player will not be uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, when an error occurs between the time when the start lever D50 is operated and the time when all the reels M50 stop rotating, a predetermined time (regardless of the time spent until the error is cleared) ( The alert image is displayed continuously for 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), but the time spent displaying the alert image is shortened by the time spent until the error is cleared or the time corresponding to that time. May be good. For example, when it takes 60,000 ms or more to clear the error, the alert image may be continuously displayed for 1000 ms.

In the present embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the error image is displayed on top of the alert image, but the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game. If an error occurs while the image is displayed, the alert image may be hidden and the error image may be displayed. Then, when the error is cleared, the error image may be hidden and the alert image may be displayed (the time for continuing to display the alert image is a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms). The following) may be used. This is suitable when it is desired to make the priority of the error image and the alert image the same.

In the present embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared) is included. Instead, the alert image was continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less), but the time during which the error image was continuously displayed (the time spent until the error was cleared) was included. , The alert image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less). Regardless of whether or not the error image is displayed (whether or not an error has occurred), the attention alert image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). There is no need to increase the burden on the side.

In the present embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the time that has been displayed before the error image is displayed (the error occurs) is included. However, it is possible not to include the time that has been displayed before the error image is displayed (the error occurs). This is suitable when there is a high possibility that the player's consciousness deviates from the attention-calling image due to the display of the error image.

In the present embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of an advantageous game, the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped. However, the measurement of the minimum game time may be temporarily stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the caution image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button is enabled, and the player will not be uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the priority of the error image (also referred to as display priority or display priority) is higher than that of the alert image. Although it has been set, the priority of the alert image may be set higher than that of the error image. However, since it is not preferable that the type of error that has occurred cannot be specified by the alert image, it is preferable that the position where the alert image is displayed does not overlap with the position where the type of error that has occurred is specified. .. As long as the type of error that has occurred can be specified, the error image and the alert image may overlap.

In this case, the warning image is displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) including the time that the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared). You may keep doing it.

In the present embodiment, when the power supply is stopped while the warning image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the time that has been displayed before the power supply is stopped is included. , Do not include the time that was displayed before the power supply was stopped, and after the power supply is resumed, continue to display the warning image for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). You may do it. This is suitable when there is a high possibility that the player's consciousness deviates from the alert image due to the power supply being stopped.

In the present embodiment, the staging display device S40 that starts up (restarts the display) immediately when the power supply is restarted is used, but even when the staging display device S40 that takes a long time to start up is used, the power supply is supplied. The alert image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) including the time that was continuously displayed before the stop. Depending on the time until activation, the alert image will continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button is enabled, which may cause discomfort to the player, but the alert image is displayed. This is because if the duration is shortened, there is a slight possibility that the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited. However, if there is a possibility of causing a great deal of discomfort to the player, the time for displaying the alert image may be shortened by the time until the start-up or a predetermined time corresponding to the time. It should be noted that the time that was continuously displayed before the power supply was stopped may not be included in the time that the alert image is continuously displayed.

In the present embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, the game medal is inserted after the awarded game medal is added as the number of credits or is actually paid out (when the bet button D220 is operated or the medal insertion slot D170. If the sub-input button SB is operated before the game medal is inserted, the menu screen is displayed on the effect display device S40, but whether or not the game medal is awarded. Regardless of this, if the sub input button SB is operated before the start lever D50 is operated, the menu screen may be displayed on the effect display device S40. The menu screen is a screen for setting the game environment such as the volume output from the speaker S20 and the brightness of the effect display device S40 according to the player's preference.

In the present embodiment, the position where the attention-calling image is displayed is set so that the selected item can be seen when the above-mentioned menu screen is displayed, but the selected item cannot be known. You may do it. By doing so, it is possible to positively direct the player's consciousness to the attention-calling image and to recognize the immersiveness.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, even if the alert image continues to be displayed, the operation of the start lever D50 or the like is effective (the game progresses), but this is limited to this. However, while the alert image continues to be displayed, the same freeze as described above may be executed. In other words, the operation of the start lever D50 or the like may be invalidated (the progress of the game may be stopped). Although it causes discomfort to the player, it is possible to maximize the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersiveness. Specifically, since the progress of the game is stopped for a long time, the motivation for the game can be reduced to some extent. In this case, it is appropriate that the time during which the alert image is continuously displayed is a time during which the motivation for playing can be reduced to some extent. However, if it is too long (for example, the time is longer than the minimum game time), the player may end the game. Therefore, it is preferable that the time for which the alert image is continuously displayed is 3000 ms or more and less than 4100 ms.

Further, in the case of freezing, as shown in FIG. 85, after displaying the end screen on the effect display device S40, the end screen may be hidden and only the caution image may be displayed. By displaying only the attention-calling image, the player's consciousness can be surely directed to the attention-calling image, so that the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness can be further exhibited. In addition, after a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and less than 4100, a predetermined time) has elapsed after displaying the alert image, the alert image is hidden and the end screen is displayed again. Alternatively, only the alert image may be continuously displayed.

First, the standby demo screen is displayed in the order of FIG. 82 (b), FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 82 (c), and then FIG. 82 is displayed at the timing of displaying FIG. 85 (b). (B) may be continuously displayed. This eliminates the need to prepare an image for displaying FIG. 85 (b).

In the present embodiment, the effect display device S40 is used to call attention, but the effect display device S40 may also be used to call attention. For example, an image having the same content as the alert image may be displayed on the panel portion of the housing at a position easily recognized by the player.

The alert image is not limited to the example. For example, an image (display) that clearly states "Pachinko / pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately. Let's be careful about getting into it." Or "Be careful about getting into it. Pachinko / pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately." May be good.

The color and font of the characters are free as long as they are not difficult for the player to recognize. For example, if the color is similar to the background image when displaying the alert image, it may be difficult for the player to recognize it. Therefore, the color occupies most of the background image (display area of the staging display device S40). Is preferably a different color. In particular, a color that is located on the opposite side of the color wheel (hereinafter, also referred to as "opposite color") or a color that is close to the opposite color is preferable because the color stands out.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate time for continuing to display the alert image is calculated by taking as an example the case where the maximum number of game medals given during the advantageous game is eight, but the game given during the advantageous game is performed. Even when the maximum number of medals is 9 or more and 15 or less, the appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is preferably 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. Certainly, when 15 game medals are awarded, the time spent for payout is about 280 ms longer than when 8 game medals are awarded, so it is necessary to continue displaying the alert image by that amount. By shortening the appropriate time, it is possible to hide the alert image before the operation of the stop button becomes effective. However, even if the alert image is hidden about 280 ms after the operation of the stop button is enabled, it is extremely unlikely that the player will notice it. If this is the case, the longer it is, the more effective it can be expected as a countermeasure against immersiveness. Therefore, it is preferable that the appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. ..

<Caution image on the standby demo screen>
As described above in FIG. 82, when the standby demo screen is displayed, an image showing the manufacturer of the gaming machine is first displayed (FIG. 82 (a)). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, a caution image is displayed (FIG. 82 (b)). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, an image (sometimes called a standby demo screen) that includes characters and objects appearing in the production of the gaming machine and introduces the theme and background of the production is displayed in a moving image format (sometimes called a standby demo screen). FIG. 82 (c). As described above, while the standby demo screen is being displayed, FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) are repeatedly displayed on the effect display device S40.

Here, in FIG. 82B, the attention-calling image is displayed while the standby demo screen is displayed, and the color of the warning-calling image is, for example, mainly yellow and black. .. On the other hand, in the display area other than the alert image, all are displayed in white, and the color is opposite to or close to the color that occupies most of the alert image and the background image.

That is, in the background image (the image displayed in the display area other than the alert image) during the display of the alert image on the standby demo screen, all the pixels are displayed in white, in other words, the color filter R. And only the pixels through which light passes through the color filter G and the color filter B, and when expressed as the brightness of red, green, and blue, only the pixels displayed in (255, 255, 255). It is configured to be. With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the alert image, and the visibility of the alert image (particularly, the visibility of the character information) is also improved.

The background image in the situation where the alert image is displayed while the standby demo screen is displayed does not have to be all white, and more than half of the pixels constituting the background image are configured to be white. Alternatively, all the pixels constituting the background image may be displayed in a color similar to white. Further, such a configuration related to the background image may be configured to always be applied during the period in which the alert image is displayed, or at a predetermined timing (predetermined period) in the period in which the alert image is displayed. It may be configured to apply.

<Relationship between alert image and game effect lamp>
As described above, in the situation where the alert image is displayed while the standby demo screen is displayed as in FIG. 82 (b), the background image is configured to be displayed in white. In some situations, the LED of the game effect lamp D26 may also be configured to light in the same white color as the background image of the staging display device. In such a configuration, all the LEDs of the game effect lamp D26 may be configured to have a timing to light up in white, or more than half of the LEDs of the game effect lamp D26 may have a timing to light up in white. Or it may be configured so that all the LEDs of the game effect lamp D26 are lit in a color similar to white, or more than half of the LEDs of the game effect lamp D26 are similar to white. It may be configured to have a timing of lighting in color. Further, the configuration relating to such a game effect lamp D26 may be configured to always be applied during the period in which the alert image is displayed, or may be configured to always apply at a predetermined timing (predetermined period) in the period in which the alert image is displayed. ) May be applied.

Further, in a situation where a warning image is displayed while the standby demo screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 82 (b), more than half of the game effect lamp D26 is displayed at the timing when the background image is displayed in a color similar to white. The LED may be configured to display in a color similar to white.

With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the alert image, and the visibility of the alert image (particularly, the visibility of the character information) is also improved.

As described above, the configuration for displaying the alert image while the standby demo screen is displayed in the effect display device can be applied to both the pachinko gaming machine and the rotating cylinder type gaming machine.

<< Configuration related to transparent plate D16 >>
Next, as a configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification, the configuration relating to the transparent plate D16 will be described in detail below. In the embodiments described in detail below, the description thereof will be omitted or simplified by assigning the same reference numerals to the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments. Further, in the present embodiment, a member which has already been described but is not designated in the above-described embodiment is newly designated, but this type of member exists only in the present embodiment. However, it goes without saying that it also exists in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this is not limited to this embodiment, but the same applies to other embodiments.

First, FIG. 90 is a diagram relating to a transparent plate D16 applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification. The transparent plate D16 in the figure shows a state of being removed from the gaming machine.

FIG. 90A is a front view of the transparent plate D16. The transparent plate D16 is composed of a glass plate D60 and a transparent plate frame portion D61. The glass plate D60 is a glass plate that occupies most of the transparent plate D16, and the transparent plate frame portion D61 is a member made of plastic or the like provided around the glass plate. By providing the transparent plate frame portion D61 on the transparent plate D16, it is possible to prevent the glass plate D60 from being damaged by impact, vibration, or the like.

Next, FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the transparent plate D16. The upper direction in the figure is the front side direction when viewed from the player, and the lower direction in the figure is the back side direction when viewed from the player.

As shown in the figure, the transparent plate frame portion D61 has a frame step portion D62 which is a step with the glass plate D60. Further, the frame step portion D62 is provided only in the back side direction when viewed from the player, and is not provided in the front side direction. It should be noted that the figure is merely an example, and the frame step portion D62 may be provided only in the front side direction when viewed from the player, and may not be provided in the back side direction. Further, the maximum length of the frame step portion D62 in the height direction may be configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball, or may be configured to be shorter than the thickness of the φ25 game medal. , Φ30 may be configured to be shorter than the thickness of the game medal.

By providing the frame step portion D62 only on one side of the transparent plate frame portion D61 in this way, it is possible to prevent the transparent plate D16 from being misoriented when it is attached to the door D18.

Next, FIG. 90 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of the transparent plate D16. The upper direction in the figure is the front side direction when viewed from the player, and the lower direction in the figure is the back side direction when viewed from the player.

As shown in the figure, a transparent plate gap D63 is provided between the transparent plate frame portion D61 and the glass plate D60 only on the back side when viewed from the player. Further, as shown in the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA, the transparent plate gap D63 is partially provided on the outer periphery of the glass plate D60 in the back direction when viewed from the player. Although not shown, the distance (sometimes referred to as the gap width) between the inner surface of the glass plate D60 in the transparent plate gap D63 and the transparent plate frame portion D61 when viewed from the player is not uniform and has a plurality of types. Has a gap width of. The maximum length of the gap width is shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area from jumping out of the gaming machine. can.

The configuration of the transparent plate gap D63 in the figure is merely an example, and the position of the transparent plate gap D63 in the glass plate D60 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. Any configuration may be used as long as it has a D63 and is configured not to have a transparent plate gap D63 in other portions on the outer periphery of the glass plate D60.

As described above, the transparent plate gap D63 in the glass plate D60 is provided on the back side when viewed from the player, but is not provided on the front side when viewed from the player. Therefore, when the transparent plate D16 is attached to the door D18, the transparent plate gap D16 is provided. It is possible to prevent the direction from being wrong. The transparent plate gap D63 may be provided only on the front side when viewed from the player.

Further, the distance (sometimes referred to as the gap width) between the inner surface of the glass plate D60 in the transparent plate gap D63 and the transparent plate frame portion D61 when viewed from the player is not uniform and has a plurality of types of gap widths. By configuring the transparent plate D16 as such, it is possible to ventilate the game area without making the strength of the transparent plate D16 too low, and problems such as heat buildup in the game area and deformation are unlikely to occur. Therefore, the life of the gaming machine can be extended.

Further, regarding the configuration regarding the height of the frame step portion D62 described above, the height (length in the height direction) of the frame step portion D62 in the portion having no transparent plate gap D63 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. It may be configured to be short, it may be configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball, it may be configured to be shorter than the thickness of the game medal of φ25, or it may be configured to be shorter than the thickness of the game medal of φ30. The height (length in the height direction) of the frame step portion D62, which is the highest including the portion having no transparent plate gap D63, may be shorter than the diameter of the game ball. It may be configured to be short, it may be configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball, it may be configured to be shorter than the thickness of the game medal of φ25, or it may be configured to be shorter than the thickness of the game medal of φ30. It may be configured to be shorter than the thickness.

<< Configuration related to staging display device SG >>
Further, the following configuration may be applied as the configuration of the effect display device SG in the pachinko gaming machine in the present specification.

The outer peripheral surface of the display area SG10 in the effect display device SG may be provided with an outer peripheral surface protruding toward the front when viewed from the player. When configured in this way, it may be configured as follows.
(1) The surface on the outer peripheral surface on the display area SG10 side is black (or substantially the same color as black) (2) The substrate is not mounted on the surface on the outer peripheral surface on the display area SG10 side (3). ) Display area on the outer peripheral surface At least a part of the surface on the SG10 side is black (or substantially the same color as black). (4) The substrate cannot be visually recognized even if the player sees the outer peripheral surface. The above-mentioned one or more configurations may be applied, and by such a configuration, the light emitted by the effect display device SG is reflected on the outer peripheral surface and reflected on the effect display device SG. It can be prevented (or alleviated).

<< Structure related to gaps >>
Further, as a configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine in the present specification, a gap may be provided in a part between the outer frame D12 and the door D18. In such a case, it is preferable that the length of the maximum width of the gap is less than the diameter of the game ball. With this configuration, the gaming ball does not accidentally enter the inside of the door D18, fraudulent acts from outside the gaming machine can be prevented, and the gaming area can be ventilated. It is less likely that problems such as heat buildup and deformation will occur, and the life of the gaming machine can be extended.

<< Game ball rolling on the guide rail D33 >>
As described above in FIG. 42, in the pachinko gaming machine in the present specification, when the gaming ball is launched by the launching device D42, the launched gaming ball is a part of the outer rail D32 and the inner rail D34. It is configured to move along the guide rail D33 partitioned by the part, pass through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and flow down the game area D30.

When the game ball is launched in this way, the game ball that reaches the game area D30 (the game ball that passes through the prevention piece D39-1) does not come into contact with the transparent plate D16 (glass plate D60) regardless of the firing strength. It may be configured as follows. As a specific example, it seems that a part of the outer rail D32 (for example, a part closer to the launching device D42 than the prevention piece D39-1 in the entire outer rail D32) is tilted downward from the front to the back when viewed from the player. The launching device D42, which is configured to continuously contact (or easily contact) the gaming board D35 to reach the gaming area, launches the gaming ball at a predetermined angle (for example, 5 degrees). ) May be configured to fire in the back direction (in the direction of the game board D35) when viewed from the player.

The problem with the pachinko gaming machine (A1) is that when such a game component is attached to the game board, the game ball flowing down the game board collides with the screw to which the game component is attached, causing the screw to loosen. It may end up. In this way, if the screw is in a loose state, the game balls overlap at the loosened part of the screw, hindering the flow of the game ball, and the game cannot be played, which impairs the interest of the player's game. It will be a factor. Therefore, there is a demand for a pachinko gaming machine that can prevent a player from spoiling the interest of the game.

The pachinko gaming machine (A1) according to the aspect (1) is
A game board that allows game balls to flow down, and
The transparent plate provided on the front of the game board and
Multiple game nails planted on the game board,
It is provided on the flow path of the game ball and is provided with a predetermined screw for screwing a game component (for example, a center decoration D38) onto the game board.
A first length (eg, 1/3) that is a predetermined proportion (eg, 1/3) of the longitudinal length (eg, D) of a predetermined game nail planted at a position closest to the predetermined screw. For example, D2) is planted on the game board,
A second length (eg, 1/3 x A), which is the length of the predetermined ratio (eg, 1/3) of the length of the predetermined screw in the longitudinal direction (for example, A), is in the game board. In a state in which the third length (for example, 2/3 × A) of the predetermined screw protrudes from the game board.
It is characterized in that the value obtained by subtracting the third length from the length from the game board to the transparent plate (for example, E) (for example, C3) is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, B). It is a pachinko game machine.

The effect of the pachinko gaming machine (A1), according to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, does not hinder the flow of the gaming ball even if the screw attaching the gaming component to the gaming board is loosened. It has the effect of being able to do so.

The background technology of the pachinko gaming machine (A2), the most popular pachinko gaming machine at present, is a "special pattern" (or main) on the display part such as 7-segment, triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the starting port. When a symbol called (game symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state (normally closed) is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state. This is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game in which the large winning opening (so-called attacker) in the state opens up under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The staging symbol to be produced is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example) in accordance with this. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the design. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden and a highly interesting moving image is displayed instead. One of them is a method to improve the interest of the game by such a directing method. Further, in this type of pachinko gaming machine, the game board is provided with game parts such as a center decoration to help improve the fun of the game.

A problem with pachinko gaming machines (A2), when a pachinko gaming machine with such gaming parts installed on a gaming board is installed on a gaming island in a state of being tilted from the front side to the rear side, a certain game that flows down the gaming area. A situation occurs in which the ball stays on the game parts, hindering the flow of other game balls, and the game cannot be played, which is one of the factors that impair the interest of the player's game. Therefore, there is a demand for a pachinko gaming machine that can prevent a player from spoiling the interest of the game.

The pachinko gaming machine (A2) according to the aspect (2) is
A game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, and
The transparent plate provided on the front of the game board and
Multiple game nails planted on the game board,
A game component (for example, center decoration D38) that is provided at a predetermined position on the game board and allows the game ball to roll on the upper surface.
It is provided on the flow path of the game ball and is provided with a predetermined screw for screwing the game component onto the game board.
A predetermined portion (for example, eaves portion D38-1) is provided on the upper surface of the game component, and the game component has a predetermined portion (for example, eaves portion D38-1).
The predetermined portion is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is inclined downward toward the front.

The effect of the pachinko gaming machine (A2), according to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, even when the pachinko gaming machine is installed on the game island in a state of being tilted from the front side to the rear side, the gaming ball is It has the effect of preventing the situation where it stays on the game parts.

The background technology of pachinko gaming machines (A3), the most popular pachinko gaming machines at present, is a "special design" (or main) on the display part such as 7-segment, triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the starting port. When a symbol called (game symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state (normally closed) is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state. This is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game in which the large winning opening (so-called attacker) in the state opens up under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The staging symbol to be produced is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example) in accordance with this. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the design. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden and a highly interesting moving image is displayed instead. One of them is a method to improve the interest of the game by such a directing method. Further, in this type of pachinko gaming machine, the game board is provided with game parts such as a ball return prevention member to help improve the fun of the game.

A problem with the pachinko gaming machine (A3), in a state where such a ball return prevention member is provided in the game area, a situation may occur in which the launched game ball once flows into the game area and then flows back to the guide rail side. , When the launched game ball flows into the game area, the game ball may stay at the tip of the ball return prevention member, and the game ball launched after that may flow into the game area. Since it hinders the progress of the game, it is one of the factors that impair the interest of the player's game. Therefore, there is a demand for a pachinko gaming machine that can prevent a player from spoiling the interest of the game.

The pachinko gaming machine (A3) according to the aspect (3) is
A game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, and
Launch means to launch a game ball toward the game area,
A guide rail that guides the game ball launched by the launching means to the game area,
It is provided near the exit of the guide rail and is provided with a prevention piece (for example, prevention piece D39-1) that prevents the game ball that has flowed into the game area from returning to the inside of the guide rail.
The prevention piece has a first position (for example, a guide position) capable of guiding the game ball launched into the game area and a second position (for example) for preventing the game ball flowing into the game area from returning to the guide rail. , Initial position) can be displaced,
In a state where the prevention piece is located at the second position, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the prevention piece faces upward and the game ball does not stay on the right side of the prevention piece.

The effect of the pachinko gaming machine (A3), according to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, the gaming ball is prevented from flowing back to the guide rail side after once flowing into the gaming area, and the gaming ball is in the gaming area. It has the effect of preventing it from staying in the slingshot.

The background technology of the pachinko gaming machine (B1), the most popular pachinko gaming machine at present, is a "special pattern" (or main) on the display part such as 7-segment, triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the starting port. When a symbol called (game symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state (normally closed) is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state. This is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game in which the large winning opening (so-called attacker) in the state opens up under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The staging symbol to be produced is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example) in accordance with this. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the design. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden and a highly interesting moving image is displayed instead. One of them is a method to improve the interest of the game by such a directing method. Further, in this type of pachinko gaming machine, a prize opening such as a start opening is provided in the game board, and a prize ball or a special game is given to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening.

The problem of the pachinko gaming machine (B1), the game parts of the winning opening such as the starting opening are attached to the game board, and the ball entry sensor that detects the game ball that has passed through the starting opening is visually recognized by the player. There is a problem of fraudulent acts such as launching a game ball with a fishing line attached to it in a possible position and getting a prize ball by illegally entering the starting port or aiming for a special game. .. Therefore, there is a demand for a pachinko gaming machine capable of preventing such fraudulent activities.

The pachinko gaming machine (B1) according to the aspect (4) is
A game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, and
The main game start port, which is provided at a predetermined position on the game board and allows the game ball to enter,
A guide flow path through which the game ball that has entered the main game start port can flow down,
Equipped with a game ball detection device that can detect the game ball that has entered the main game start port.
The guide flow path is provided with a guide flow path component that guides the game ball that has entered the main game start port in a direction different from the entry direction.
This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that a guide flow path component is interposed on a straight line connecting a predetermined location at the entrance of the main game start port and a predetermined location of the game ball detection device.

According to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine (B1) and the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

The background technology of pachinko gaming machines (B2), the most popular pachinko gaming machines at present, is a "special pattern" (or main) on the display unit such as 7-segment, triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the starting port. When a symbol called (game symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state (normally closed) is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state. This is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game in which the large winning opening (so-called attacker) in the state opens up under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The staging symbol to be produced is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example) in accordance with this. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the design. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden and a highly interesting moving image is displayed instead. One of them is a method to improve the interest of the game by such a directing method.

The problem of the pachinko gaming machine (B2), in such a pachinko gaming machine, it is configured to acquire a random number that determines whether or not to shift to a special game when the gaming ball enters the starting port. ing. Then, by intentionally shutting off the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine and then restarting the power supply, a fraudulent act aiming at a random number corresponding to the special game has become a problem. Therefore, there is a demand for a pachinko gaming machine capable of preventing such fraudulent activities.

The pachinko gaming machine (B2) according to the aspect (5) is
A game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, and
Launch means to launch a game ball toward the game area,
A guide rail that guides the game ball launched by the launching means to the game area,
A preventive piece provided near the exit of the guide rail to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the game area from returning to the inside of the guide rail.
The main game start port, which is provided at a predetermined position on the game board and allows the game ball to enter,
Equipped with a game ball detection device that can detect the game ball that has entered the main game start port.
When the game ball is launched by the launcher and the game ball is moving along the guide rail, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is cut off, and the game ball is moving along the guide rail. When the power supply is restarted and the launched game ball passes through the prevention piece and then passes through the game ball detection device through the main game start port, the game ball is detected by the game ball detection device after the power supply is restarted. The time until the detection becomes possible (for example, ta) is the time from when the launched game ball passes through the prevention piece to when it passes through the game ball detection device through the main game start port (for example,). It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be longer than t4).

According to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine (B2) and the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

The background technology of pachinko gaming machines (B3), the most popular pachinko gaming machines at present, is a "special pattern" (or main) on the display part such as 7-segment, triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the starting port. When a symbol called (game symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state (normally closed) is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state. This is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game in which the large winning opening (so-called attacker) in the state opens up under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The staging symbol to be produced is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example) in accordance with this. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the design. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden and a highly interesting moving image is displayed instead. One of them is a method to improve the interest of the game by such a directing method. Further, in this type of pachinko gaming machine, the game board is provided with game parts such as a center decoration to help improve the fun of the game.

The problem of the pachinko gaming machine (B3) is that when such a game component is attached to the game board, the game ball flowing down the game board collides with a game nail or a game part, so that the game ball does not flow down. Although it is a rule, the game ball flows down to the area intended to be irregular even after the game ball collides with the protective wall of the game part, which is the role of protecting the inside of the game part. Since it cannot be made to play, it is one of the factors that impair the interest of the player's game. Therefore, there is a demand for a pachinko gaming machine that can prevent a player from spoiling the interest of the game.

The pachinko gaming machine (B3) according to the aspect (6) is
A game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, and
Multiple game nails planted on the game board,
A center decoration (eg, for example) that is attached to a predetermined position on the game board and has at least a wall portion (for example, wall portion D38-7) that partitions the game area and a mounting portion (for example, the mounting portion D38-6 of the first region). With center decoration D38)
The game board and the mounting portion are configured to be mounted by a predetermined mounting tool (for example, screw BS1).
In a state where the center of the game ball is located on a straight line connecting the center of the game nail closest to the mounting portion and the center of the predetermined mounting tool, and the game ball is in contact with the wall portion, the front surface. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the entire game ball is visually overlapped with respect to the mounting portion.

According to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine (B3) and the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the player from impairing the interest of the game.

The background technology of pachinko gaming machines (B4), the most popular pachinko gaming machines at present, is a "special pattern" (or main) on the display unit such as 7-segment, triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the starting port. When a symbol called (game symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state (normally closed) is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state. This is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game in which the large winning opening (so-called attacker) in the state opens up under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The staging symbol to be produced is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example) in accordance with this. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode.

Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the design. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden and a highly interesting moving image is displayed instead. One of them is a method to improve the interest of the game by such a directing method. Further, in this type of pachinko gaming machine, providing a gaming nail on the gaming board helps to improve the fun of the game.

The problem with the pachinko gaming machine (B4) is that when such a game nail is provided on the game board, the game ball flowing down the game board collides with the game nail, causing the game nail to come off the game board. In some cases. In this way, when the game nails are pulled out, after the game balls are caught between the game nails on both sides of the part where the game nails are pulled out, the game balls overlap and hinder the flow of the game balls, and the game is played. Since it becomes impossible, it becomes one of the factors that impair the interest of the player's game. Therefore, there is a demand for a pachinko gaming machine that can prevent a player from spoiling the interest of the game.

The pachinko gaming machine (B4) according to the aspect (7) is
A game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, and
Equipped with a series of nails that are provided on the game board and are composed of multiple game nails lined up.
The continuous nail is
At least the first game nail, the second game nail, and the third game nail are arranged in this order.
In front view, the second game nail is provided at a higher position than the third game nail, and the first game nail is provided at a higher position than the second game nail.
In a state where the second game nail is pulled out from the game board and the game ball is in contact with the first game nail and the third game nail, the game ball is more than the upper end of the first game nail. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the center is configured to be higher in front view.

The effect of the pachinko game machine (B4), according to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, even if the game nail comes off the game board, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down. It has the effect of being able to do it.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game start opening entry determination means, MJ11-H auxiliary game entry opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 1st big winning opening entry determination means Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning opening ball entry determination means MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A 1st main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H auxiliary Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 hold control means, MJ31 hold digestion control means MJ31j fluctuation start condition satisfaction judgment means, MJ32 symbol hold means MJ32-A first main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-A first main game symbol hold information temporary Storage means MJ32-B 2nd main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B 2nd main game symbol holding information Temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol holding means, MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol holding information Temporary storage means MN Game content determination Means, MN10 Win / Fail Lottery Means MN11-A 1st Main Game Win / Fail Lottery Means, MN11ta-A 1st Main Game Win / Fail Lottery Table MN11-B 2nd Main Game Win / Fail Lottery Means, MN11ta-B 2nd Main Game Win / Fail Lottery Table MN11-H Auxiliary Game Win / Fail Lottery Means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary Game Win / Fail Lottery Table MN20 Special Game Transition Determining Means, MN40 Symbol Content Determining Means MN41-A 1st Main Game Symbol Determining Means, MN41ta-A 1st Main Game Symbol Determination Lottery table MN41-B 2nd main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 variable mode determination means , MN51-A 1st main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B 2nd main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table , MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progress means MP10 display control means, MP11-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11t-C 1st. 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening / closing control means MP21-B 2nd main Game start port Electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means, MP2 2t-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening timer MP30 Special game control means, MP31 Condition determination means MP32 Special game content determination means, MP32ta Special game content reference table MP33 Special game execution means, MP33-C 1st and 1st 2 Large prize opening Electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 Special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probability change end condition determination means, MP52 Time reduction end condition determination means MP52c Time reduction count counter, MB game state temporary storage means MB10-C 1st and 2nd main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary Game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game-related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game-related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control means MT10 command transmission buffer, MH prize ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1 Main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device , B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit B21h 2nd Main game symbol hold display, C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripherals C10 1st big prize opening, C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device C11d 1st big winning opening Electric accessory, C20 2nd big winning opening C21s 2nd prize opening prize detection device, C21d 2nd prize opening electric accessory D38 center decoration, D38-1 eaves, D38-2 flow path, D38-4 flow path D38-5 taper part, D38-6 mounting Part, D38-7 Wall part D39 Ball return prevention member, D39-1 Prevention piece, D39-2 Base H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol hold display unit P10 left general winning opening, P20 right general winning opening S sub-control board, SM sub-game control means (sub-main control unit)
MH20 main display device, SH20 sub display device SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative symbol display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta drawing change content determination lottery Table SM21ta-2 Decorative design effect table, SM21b Design-related information temporary storage means SM21t-1 1st design fluctuation time management timer, SM22 design reservation information display control means,
SM22b Temporary storage of drawing reservation information, SM23 background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means, SM23b Background effect related information Temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect related information Temporary storage means, SM25 reach effect display control means SM25n reach effect display content determination means, SM25b reach effect related information temporary storage means SM27 right-handed display control means, SM40 information transmission / reception control means SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 sub Information transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display-related information Temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative symbol display area, SG12 1st hold display area SG13 2nd hold display area KH prize ball payout control board , KE prize ball payout device YK1 movable accessory device, YK12 logo accessory YK10 movable base part, YK30 front side surface part YK40 back side surface part, YK21 accessory lamp YK22 countersunk screw, D50 upper surface part D51 step surface, D52 front frame upper surface D53 Outer frame upper surface, D54 groove D55 groove bottom, D56 groove side surface D60 glass plate, D61 transparent plate frame part D62 frame step portion, D63 transparent plate gap

Claims (1)

A staging display unit that can display images and
Equipped with a movable object for directing that can be moved,
When the movable object for staging performs a predetermined operation, it has a timing to be located in front of the staging display unit.
Movable objects for staging
The front surface that can be seen from the front and
The back surface that cannot be seen from the front,
Having a predetermined board on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted,
The color that occupies the largest area among the colors of the back side display unit and the color of the effect display unit when the effect display unit does not display an image are the same type of color.
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined substrate is configured so as not to protrude from the front surface portion or the back surface portion.

Images